US20120322026A1 - Dental Curing Lights and a Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation and Filling Technique - Google Patents
Dental Curing Lights and a Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation and Filling Technique Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20120322026A1 US20120322026A1 US13/600,384 US201213600384A US2012322026A1 US 20120322026 A1 US20120322026 A1 US 20120322026A1 US 201213600384 A US201213600384 A US 201213600384A US 2012322026 A1 US2012322026 A1 US 2012322026A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- light
- light guide
- section
- tooth
- dental
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- IFTRQJLVEBNKJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCC1CCCC1 Chemical compound CCC1CCCC1 IFTRQJLVEBNKJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61C—DENTISTRY; APPARATUS OR METHODS FOR ORAL OR DENTAL HYGIENE
- A61C5/00—Filling or capping teeth
- A61C5/80—Dental aids fixed to teeth during treatment, e.g. tooth clamps
- A61C5/85—Filling bands, e.g. matrix bands; Manipulating tools therefor
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61C—DENTISTRY; APPARATUS OR METHODS FOR ORAL OR DENTAL HYGIENE
- A61C19/00—Dental auxiliary appliances
- A61C19/003—Apparatus for curing resins by radiation
-
- A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
- A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
- A61C—DENTISTRY; APPARATUS OR METHODS FOR ORAL OR DENTAL HYGIENE
- A61C5/00—Filling or capping teeth
- A61C5/80—Dental aids fixed to teeth during treatment, e.g. tooth clamps
- A61C5/88—Wedges
Definitions
- the present invention relates methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth and for dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits that may be used in the methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth.
- Dental cavities that have spread to the dentin or have undergone cavitation are typically treated by removing the decayed portion of the tooth and thereafter filling the missing tooth structure with a restorative material such as silver (amalgam), white (resin), porcelain, or gold. Cavities that are located adjacent to neighboring teeth are called interproximal cavities.
- the dentist When treating interproximal cavities, the dentist first removes the decayed portion of the side of the tooth. In order to properly deposit the restorative material on the side of the tooth without undesired leaking of the restorative material beyond the side of the tooth, the dentist places a dental matrix around at least a portion of the tooth.
- the dental matrix may be a metallic or plastic strip, and when the matrix is placed around at least a portion of the tooth, the matrix acts as a form for the desired shape of the restored tooth.
- Various dental matrix bands are shown in U.S. Pat. Nos.
- One or more dental wedges may be used to spread adjacent teeth to allow the dental matrix to be positioned between the adjacent teeth.
- the dental wedge(s) may also function as a matrix stabilizer that maintains the matrix in a desired position with respect to the tooth to be restored.
- Various dental wedges are shown in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,890,176, 6,761,562, 6,482,007, 6,435,874, 6,425,760, 6,234,792, 5,527,181, 5,104,317, 4,468,199, 4,337,041, 4,259,070 and D439,667.
- a dental separator ring may also be used when filling interproximal cavities.
- the separator ring applies pressure against the adjacent teeth to force the adjacent teeth apart to allow a dental matrix to be positioned between the adjacent teeth.
- the dental separator ring may also include specially configured ends that also function as a matrix stabilizer that maintains the matrix in a desired position with respect to the tooth to be restored.
- Example dental separator rings can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,325,625, 6,206,697 and 5,607,302.
- a dentist may choose to use curable restorative material to fill the interproximal cavity.
- Many curable dental restorative materials harden by polymerization reactions initiated by ultraviolet light or blue wavelengths.
- the dentist uses a dental curing light device to direct light onto the curable restorative material to initiate polymerization of the curable restorative material.
- the curable restorative material then hardens in the cavity.
- Example dental lights and light curing devices can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,097,364, 6,976,841, 6,155,823, 6,162,055, and 5,017,140 and U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2006/0275733, 2006/0275732, 2006/018835, 2006/0155171, 2006/0154197, 2006/0110700, 2006/0088798, 2004/0229186 and 2004/0053189.
- the invention meets the foregoing needs by providing improved methods, dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth.
- the invention provides a method for the restoration of a tooth having an original shape including a top surface and an interproximal surface.
- a portion of the top surface of the tooth and a portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth are removed using conventional dental instruments to form a hollow cavity preparation that extends from the top surface to the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- the hollow cavity preparation is preferably saucer shaped wherein the cavity preparation does not extend inward more than two millimeters from the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- the removed portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth is then surrounded with a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomic dental matrix.
- the actual anatomic shapes of the matrix are created from scans of natural teeth, molds of natural teeth, and/or molds of tooth models.
- anatomic it is meant that the matrix has an inner surface that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored.
- a lightly filled or unfilled light curable resin tooth bonding agent is then applied to the tooth covering the entire cavity preparation.
- the resin tooth bonding agent is then air thinned except on the tooth surface where a small pool of resin tooth bonding agent is maintained.
- the resin tooth bonding agent is not light cured at this point.
- a light-curable flowable composite is injected into the cavity preparation to create a pool of the flowable composite and the tooth bonding agent in the cavity preparation.
- a light-curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of the flowable composite and the tooth bonding agent before light curing the pool of the flowable composite.
- the flowable composite and the paste composite resin and the tooth bonding agent contained in the cavity preparation are then light cured simultaneously. The result is an injection molded restoration.
- a curable base material can be loaded into deeper cavity preparations to cover the dentin.
- the curable base material is cured before beginning the injection molding process.
- the cured base material is about two millimeters from the projected outer tooth surface of the restoration.
- a pre-wedging step occurs in that a wedge is inserted between the interproximal surfaces of the teeth before beginning the cavity preparation. This creates a gap between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and the interproximal surface of a second tooth, and also protects and compresses the soft tissue and rubber dam.
- the wedge is removed, and thereafter the removed portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth is surrounded with the matrix.
- a translucent elastic matrix stabilizer can also be positioned in contact with the matrix to maintain contact of the matrix with the tooth being restored.
- a separator ring can also be positioned in contact with the matrix stabilizer to create separation between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and an interproximal surface of a second tooth adjacent the tooth being restored.
- light is directed at the top surface of the tooth, the buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and the lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- curing light is simultaneously directed at the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a single load of restorative material can be cured in a single step to produce a seamless cavity restoration.
- the invention provides a method for the restoration of a tooth having an original shape including a top surface and an interproximal surface.
- a portion of the top surface of the tooth and a portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth are removed to form a hollow cavity preparation which extends from the top surface to the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- the removed portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth is surrounded with a matrix.
- a light-curable resin tooth bonding agent is placed into the cavity preparation.
- a light-curable flowable composite is then injected into the cavity preparation to create a pool of the flowable composite in the cavity preparation.
- a light-curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of the flowable composite before light curing the pool of the flowable composite.
- the bonding agent and the flowable composite and the paste composite resin contained in the cavity preparation are then simultaneously light cured.
- the dental practitioner may utilize an acid etching step with liquid and/or gel phosphoric acid treatment before placing the bonding agent into the cavity preparation.
- the bonding agent is self-etching.
- the method can include a pre-wedging step including inserting a wedge pre-operatively between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and an interproximal surface of a second tooth adjacent the tooth being restored to separate the tooth being restored and the second tooth and to protect non-diseased surfaces between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and the interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- the cavity preparation can then be formed, and the wedge removed.
- the dental practitioner may position a translucent elastic matrix stabilizer in contact with the matrix to maintain contact of the matrix with the tooth being restored and/or to create separation of the teeth.
- the dental practitioner may also position a separator ring with a transparent and anatomic interproximal zone in contact with the matrix stabilizer and matrix to create separation between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and an interproximal surface of a second tooth adjacent the tooth being restored.
- the dental practitioner may simultaneously direct light at the top surface of the tooth, at a buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and at a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- the dental practitioner may direct light at the top surface of the tooth, and then thereafter simultaneously direct light at a buccal portion and a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- light is directed from a first light guide at a buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and directed from a second light guide at a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, wherein the first light guide and the second light guide are hinged at a dental curing light housing.
- the hollow cavity preparation is preferably saucer shaped.
- the cavity preparation does not extend inward more than two millimeters from the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in an occlusal view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation.
- the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in a gingival view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation.
- the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in a buccal view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation.
- the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in a lingual view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation.
- the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped in an occlusal view, and/or buccal view, and/or lingual view, and/or gingival view.
- the matrix can be translucent, sectional, and/or anatomically shaped.
- the matrix can be tooth specific, or the matrix can be tooth type specific, or the matrix can be tooth surface specific.
- further flowable composite and/or paste composite resin are not added after the first load of flowable composite and paste composite resin such that the method produces a single cured layer load and layer of flowable composite and paste composite resin.
- the filled cavity preparation is seamless, injection molded, and/or not layered.
- a curable base/liner material is loaded into the cavity preparation, the base/liner material is cured, and thereafter the light-curable flowable composite is injected into the cavity preparation to create the pool of the flowable composite in the cavity preparation.
- an external surface of the cured base/liner material is two millimeters or less from a projected external interproximal filling surface of the tooth.
- the invention provides a first embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer includes an elongated elastic body having a first end portion, a second opposite end portion, a middle portion connecting the first end portion and the second end portion, a first side surface, a second side surface, a top surface and a bottom surface.
- the first end portion has a first throughhole extending from the top surface to the bottom surface
- the second end portion has a second throughhole extending from the top surface to the bottom surface.
- the first end portion includes an area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a first end surface of the body whereby the first end portion can be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area of material weakness, which can extend from the first throughhole to the first end surface of the body.
- the body comprises a translucent material.
- the body comprises a translucent material.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer can be made with translucent elastomeric material with a round and/or tapered cross section. The interproximal dental matrix stabilizer can be used in place of traditional wooden, plastic or rubber wedges and also allows for better photon transfer from a curing light.
- the second end portion includes a second area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a second end surface of the body whereby the second end portion can be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the second area of material weakness.
- the top surface of the body includes a first pair of upper side-by-side depressions in the middle portion of the body, and the bottom surface of the body includes at least one concavity in the middle portion of the body.
- the first pair of upper side-by-side depressions include an inwardly curved inner surface
- the bottom surface of the body includes a concavity having an inwardly curved inner surface.
- the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body.
- the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near the first throughhole
- the second side surface of the body includes a second curved protrusion located near the second throughhole.
- the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near the first throughhole
- the second side surface of the body includes a second curved protrusion located near the first throughhole
- the separate end members have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the invention provides a second embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer includes an elongated elastic body having a first end portion, a second opposite end portion, a middle portion connecting the first end portion and the second end portion, a first side surface, a second side surface, a top surface and a bottom surface.
- the first side surface of the body includes a first outwardly extending protrusion on the first end portion wherein the first outwardly extending protrusion is spaced inward from a first end surface of the body.
- the first side surface of the body further includes a second outwardly extending protrusion on the second end portion wherein the second outwardly extending protrusion is spaced inward from a second end surface of the body.
- the body comprises a translucent material.
- the first end portion includes a first section adjacent the first outwardly extending protrusion and a second section connected to the first section of the first end portion opposite the first outwardly extending protrusion wherein the second section of the first end portion extends laterally outward from the first section of the first end portion
- the second end portion includes a first section adjacent the second outwardly extending protrusion and a second section connected to the first section of the second end portion opposite the second outwardly extending protrusion wherein the second section of the second end portion extends laterally outward from the first section of the second end portion.
- the second section of the first end portion is generally disc shaped
- the second section of the second end portion is generally disc shaped.
- the top surface includes indicia for facilitating placement of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer between approximating teeth with the top surface positioned away from the gingiva.
- the second side surface of the body includes a third outwardly extending protrusion on the first end portion, and the second side surface of the body further includes a fourth outwardly extending protrusion on the second end portion.
- the first end portion includes an area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a first end surface of the body whereby the first end portion can be separated into separate first end members by application of a separation force at the area of material weakness
- the second end portion includes a second area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a second end surface of the body whereby the second end portion can be separated into separate second end members by application of a separation force at the second area of material weakness.
- the first separate end members and the second separate end members have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body.
- the bottom surface of the body includes a concavity.
- the concavity can have a longitudinal axis and a lateral axis transverse to the longitudinal axis wherein the longitudinal axis extends toward the first end portion and the second end portion and the longitudinal axis is longer than the lateral axis.
- the invention provides a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix for providing a form for filling a hollow cavity preparation in a tooth.
- the matrix includes a curved strip of material.
- the strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the cavity preparation and a surface of the tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the cavity preparation and the surface of the tooth to create the form for filling the cavity preparation, which may be interproximal.
- the strip has a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface, and the strip has a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion.
- the concave side surface is anatomic in that the concave side surface has an inner surface that that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored. Also, the concave side surface and the convex side surface can extend from the first end to the second end. A first thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a first plane horizontal to the strip is less than a second thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a second plane horizontal to the strip wherein the second plane is below the first plane.
- the horizontally concave side surface forming the base portion is not vertically concave, and the horizontally concave side surface forming the upper portion is vertically concave.
- the strip thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at planes horizontal to the strip decreases from lower to upper sections of the upper portion of the strip.
- the concave side surface and the convex side surface extend from the first end to the second end.
- the material of the curved strip is translucent.
- the material is metallic.
- the material is polymeric.
- One non-limiting advantage to the translucent sectional matrix is that it allows a single load of composite material, which alleviates both the problems of (i) voids between the two millimeter separately loaded and cured increments required with composite material and a metal matrix and (ii) the additional time wasted to place and light cure several layers of composite filling material.
- the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped.
- the matrix is tooth specific.
- the matrix is tooth type specific.
- the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- the invention provides a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix for providing a form for filling a hollow cavity preparation in a tooth.
- the dental matrix includes a curved strip of material.
- the strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the cavity preparation and a surface of the tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the cavity preparation and the surface of the tooth to create the form for filling the cavity preparation, which may be interproximal.
- the strip has a first side surface and a second side surface.
- the first side surface has an intermediate horizontally convex section between a first horizontally concave section and a second horizontally concave section.
- the strip has a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion, and the base portion includes the horizontally convex section, the first horizontally concave section and the second horizontally concave section.
- the strip thickness between the first side surface and the second side surface at planes horizontal to the strip decreases from lower to upper sections of the upper portion of the strip.
- the first side surface forming the base portion is not vertically concave
- the second side surface forming the upper portion is vertically concave.
- a first thickness between the first side surface and the second side surface at a first plane horizontal to the strip is less than a second thickness between the first side surface and the second side surface at a second plane horizontal to the strip, the second plane being below the first plane.
- the material of the curved strip is translucent.
- the material is metallic.
- the material is polymeric.
- the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped.
- the matrix is tooth specific.
- the matrix is tooth type specific.
- the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- the invention provides a dental matrix for providing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth.
- the matrix includes a first curved strip of a first material.
- the first strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the first tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the first tooth to create the form for filling the first interproximal cavity preparation.
- the first strip has a first side surface and a second side surface.
- the matrix also includes a second curved strip of a second material.
- the second strip has a first side surface and a second side surface.
- the second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the second tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the second tooth to create the form for filling the second interproximal cavity preparation.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are joined at a middle portion of the multi-strip matrix, and the middle portion of the matrix has a thickness less than two times a thickness of the first end of the first curved strip.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip have an arc of less than 270 degrees.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are translucent.
- the first material and the second material can be metallic, or the first material and the second material can be polymeric.
- the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped.
- the matrix is tooth specific.
- the matrix is tooth type specific.
- the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- the first curved strip has a first horizontally concave side surface and a first horizontally convex side surface
- the second curved strip has a second horizontally concave side surface and a second horizontally convex side surface.
- the concave side surfaces of the first and second strip are anatomic in that the concave side surfaces have an inner surface that that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored.
- the concave side surface and the convex side surface can extend from the first end to the second end of the first strip and the second strip.
- the first strip has a first base portion and a first upper portion integral with and extending upward from the first base portion, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first base portion is not vertically concave, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first upper portion is vertically concave, the second strip has a second base portion and a second upper portion integral with and extending upward from the second base portion, the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second base portion is not vertically concave, and the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second upper portion is vertically concave.
- the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix.
- a matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the multi-strip matrix is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip.
- the cavity preparations may then be filled.
- the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix.
- a matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- the matrix stabilizer is placed in tension to create a middle portion of decreased cross-section in the matrix stabilizer.
- the multi-strip matrix is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip.
- the tension is then released on the matrix stabilizer such that the matrix stabilizer is placed in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip.
- the cavity preparations may then be filled.
- the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix.
- the multi-strip is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the first tooth and the second curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- At least one dental wedge is then placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip thereby biasing the first curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and biasing the second curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- the cavity preparations may then be filled.
- the invention provides a dental matrix for providing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth.
- the matrix includes a first curved strip of a first material.
- the first strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the first tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the first tooth to create the form for filling the first interproximal cavity preparation.
- the first strip has a first side surface and a second side surface, and the first curved strip has a first throughhole.
- the matrix also includes a second curved strip of a second material.
- the second strip has a first side surface and a second side surface.
- the second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the second tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the second tooth to create the form for filling the second interproximal cavity preparation.
- the second curved strip has a second throughhole.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are joined at a middle portion of the matrix.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip have an arc of less than 270 degrees.
- the middle portion of the matrix has a thickness less than two times a thickness of the first end of the first curved strip.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are translucent.
- the first material and the second material can be metallic, or the first material and the second material can be polymeric.
- the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped.
- the matrix is tooth specific.
- the matrix is tooth type specific.
- the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- the first curved strip has a first horizontally concave side surface and a first horizontally convex side surface
- the second curved strip has a second horizontally concave side surface and a second horizontally convex side surface.
- the first strip has a first base portion and a first upper portion integral with and extending upward from the first base portion, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first base portion is not vertically concave, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first upper portion is vertically concave
- the second strip has a second base portion and a second upper portion integral with and extending upward from the second base portion, the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second base portion is not vertically concave, and the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second upper portion is vertically concave.
- first throughhole and the second throughhole are aligned to create a passageway.
- first throughhole and the second throughhole are aligned, and a membrane is positioned between the first throughhole and the second throughhole.
- the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix.
- a matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- the multi-strip matrix is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip.
- the cavity preparations may then be filled.
- the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth.
- a matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- the matrix stabilizer is placed in tension to create a middle portion of decreased cross-section in the matrix stabilizer.
- the multi-strip matrix is inserted between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip.
- the tension on the matrix stabilizer is released such that the matrix stabilizer is placed in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip.
- the cavity preparations may then be filled.
- the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix.
- the multi-strip matrix is inserted between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and the second curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- At least one dental wedge is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip thereby biasing the first curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and biasing the second curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth.
- the cavity preparations may then be filled.
- the invention provides a dental matrix kit for providing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth.
- the matrix kit includes a first curved strip of a first material.
- the first strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the first tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the first tooth to create the form for filling the first interproximal cavity preparation.
- the first strip has a first side surface and a second side surface.
- the matrix kit includes a second curved strip of a second material.
- the second strip has a first side surface and a second side surface.
- the second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the second tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the second tooth to create the form for filling the second interproximal cavity preparation.
- the second curved strip has a throughhole.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are sectional and have an arc of less than 270 degrees.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are translucent.
- the first material and the second material can be metallic, or the first material and the second material can be polymeric.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are anatomically shaped.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are tooth specific.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are tooth type specific.
- the first curved strip and the second curved strip are tooth surface specific.
- the first curved strip has a first horizontally concave side surface and a first horizontally convex side surface
- the second curved strip has a second horizontally concave side surface and a second horizontally convex side surface.
- the first strip has a first base portion and a first upper portion integral with and extending upward from the first base portion, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first base portion is not vertically concave, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first upper portion is vertically concave
- the second strip has a second base portion and a second upper portion integral with and extending upward from the second base portion, the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second base portion is not vertically concave, and the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second upper portion is vertically concave.
- the invention provides a method for preparing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth.
- a first horizontally convex side surface of the first curved strip of the dental matrix kit is placed against a second horizontally convex side surface of the second curved strip of the dental matrix kit.
- a portion of the first curved strip of the dental matrix kit may also be positioned in the throughhole of the second curved strip of the dental matrix kit.
- the invention provides a dental curing light.
- the curing light includes an electrical power supply, a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the first light guide and the second light guide are connected to a housing, and at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide is hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing.
- the first light guide and the second light guide are both hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing.
- the first light guide has a first distal tip
- the second light guide has a second distal tip
- the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other.
- the first light guide and the second light guide are normally biased into a relaxed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a first distance apart
- the first light guide and the second light guide have an outwardly flexed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a second distance apart, the second distance being greater than the first distance.
- the first distance is about 4 to about 15 millimeters.
- the first light guide is in optical communication with a first light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply
- the second light guide is in optical communication with a second light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply
- the first light source is located in the first distal end of the first light guide
- the second light source is located in the second distal end of the second light guide.
- the dental curing light includes a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the third light guide may be hinged at a dental curing light housing.
- the invention provides a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation.
- Light is directed from the first light guide of the dental curing light at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation, light is simultaneously directed from the second light guide of the dental curing light at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- the invention provides a dental curing light including an electrical power supply, a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, the first tip including a first tip section having a diameter less than a diameter of the first distal end of the first light guide, a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply and a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide, the second tip including a second tip section having a diameter less than a diameter of the second distal end of the second light guide.
- the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other.
- the first light guide is in optical communication with a first light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply
- the second light guide is in optical communication with a second light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the first light source can be located in the first distal end of the first light guide
- the second light source can be located in the second distal end of the second light guide.
- the first light guide and the second light guide are connected to a housing, and at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide is hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing.
- the first tip includes a first light transmitting section extending laterally from a base of the first tip section
- the second tip includes a second light transmitting section extending laterally from a base of the second tip section.
- at least one of the first distal end of the first light guide and the second distal end of the second light guide includes an opening in fluid communication with a source of flowing air.
- the dental curing light includes a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. Preferably, the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first light guide.
- the invention provides a dental curing light and related methods for using the dental curing light.
- the dental curing includes an electrical power supply, and a light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the curing light also includes a light guide including a proximal section, a first distal section extending from the proximal section, and a second distal section extending from the proximal section.
- the proximal section is in optical communication with the light source, the first distal section and the second distal section.
- the first distal section has a first distal end
- the second distal section has a second distal end.
- the curing light also includes a first light tip having a first base connected to the first distal end of the first distal section of the light guide.
- the first light tip includes a first hollow tubular opaque body having a first aperture for emitting light.
- the first body comprises a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the first hollow body can be bent to emit light in a first selected direction from the first aperture.
- the curing light also includes a second light tip having a second base connected to the second distal end of the second distal section of the light guide.
- the second light tip includes a second hollow tubular opaque body having a second aperture for emitting light.
- the second body comprises a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the second hollow body can be bent to emit light in a second selected direction from the second aperture.
- an outside diameter of the first light tip tapers inward from the first base toward the first aperture, and an outside diameter of the second light tip tapers inward from the second base toward the second aperture.
- the tapered curing light tip adaptors are sized to fit into the narrow area between tooth surfaces and to flex to create better access and patient comfort. Tip to composite surface distance is extremely important to the depth and rate of cure where even a six millimeter distance is extremely important. Current curing light tip sizes are far too large and/or stiff to reach interproximally.
- the electrical power supply, the light source and the proximal section of the light guide are encased in a housing. In another form, the electrical power supply and the light source are encased in a housing.
- the first light tip can by removably connected to the first distal end of the first distal section of the light guide, and the second light tip can be removably connected to the second distal end of the second distal section of the light guide.
- the tapered curing light tip adaptors are sized to fit into the narrow area between tooth surfaces and to flex to create better access and patient comfort. Tip to composite surface distance is extremely important to the depth and rate of cure where even a six millimeter distance is extremely important. Current curing light tip sizes are far too large and/or stiff to reach interproximally.
- the dental curing light can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation, light is directed from the first light tip of the dental curing light at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation, and light is directed simultaneously from the second light tip of the dental curing light at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- the first light tip can be bent such that light can be directed at the buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation
- the invention provides a dental curing light and related methods for using the dental curing light.
- the dental curing light includes an electrical power supply, a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first light guide, and the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the second light guide.
- the dental curing light may include a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, and a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide wherein the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other.
- the first light guide is in optical communication with a first light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply
- the second light guide is in optical communication with a second light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply
- the third light guide is in optical communication with a third light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the first light source is located in a first distal end of the first light guide
- the second light source is located in a second distal end of the second light guide
- the third light source is located in a third distal end of the third light guide.
- the first light guide and the second light guide can be connected to a housing, and at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide can be movable with respect to the housing.
- the first light guide and the second light guide are both hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing.
- a first light transmitting tip is connected to a first distal end of the first light guide
- a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide
- the first light guide and the second light guide are normally biased into a relaxed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a first distance apart
- the first light guide and the second light guide have an outwardly flexed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a second distance apart, the second distance being greater than the first distance.
- the first distance is about 4 to about 15 millimeters.
- the invention provides a dental curing light including a housing, an electrical power supply, and an elongated arm extending from the housing.
- the arm has a distal section that terminates in a distal end wherein the distal section and the distal end define an included angle of greater than 0 degrees and less than 180 degrees.
- the curing light also includes a support having a base wall, a first wall extending from a first end of the base wall, and a spaced apart second wall extending from a second end of the base wall.
- the base wall is connected to the distal end of the arm.
- the curing light also includes a first light source in electrical communication with the power supply. The first light source transmits light away from an inner surface of the base wall.
- the curing light also includes a second light source in electrical communication with the power supply wherein the second light source transmits light away from an inner surface of the first wall.
- the curing light also includes a third light source in electrical communication with the power supply wherein the third light source transmits light away from an inner surface of the second wall.
- the included angle can be about 30 degrees to about 150 degrees. Preferably, the included angle is 60 degrees to about 120 degrees. In one form, the included angle is about 90 degrees.
- the support can have a generally U-shaped perimeter or a generally V-shaped perimeter.
- the invention provides a separator ring for separating teeth and/or for creating adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix.
- the separator ring includes an elastic metallic body that terminates in a pair of spaced apart clamping ends. The ends are dimensioned to separate teeth and/or create adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix. The ends are translucent.
- the ends include a first tip and a spaced apart second tip wherein the first tip is dimensioned to create adaptation pressure on the dental matrix and the second tip is dimensioned to create adaptation pressure on the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer.
- the ends have a configuration selected from the group consisting of J-shaped, L-shaped and V-shaped.
- the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, and the ends are removable from the elastic body.
- the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, each end includes a surface with a ridge, and the ridges are arranged in a facing relationship when the ends are attached to the legs.
- the ridges are centrally located on the surface.
- the ridges extend from one edge to an opposite edge of the surface.
- the ridges can be coplanar with the legs when the ends are attached to the legs.
- the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, and each end includes a concavity in a surface opposite the body.
- the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away laterally from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, and the body is circular.
- the body can include an arcuate cover.
- the invention provides a separator ring for separating teeth and/or for creating adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix.
- the separator ring includes an elastic metallic body that terminates in a first leg that extends away from the body and a second leg that extends away from the body wherein the first leg and the second leg are in spaced relationship.
- a first translucent clamping end is attached to the first leg; and a second translucent clamping end is attached to the second leg.
- the first end and the second end are dimensioned to separate teeth and/or create adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix when the separator ring is installed between the teeth.
- the first end is removable from the first leg, and the second end is removable from the second leg.
- the first leg extends away perpendicularly from the body, and the second leg extends away perpendicularly from the body.
- the first end includes a first surface with a first ridge
- the second end includes a second surface with a second ridge
- the first ridge and the second ridge are arranged in a facing relationship when the first end is attached to the first leg and the second end is attached to the second leg.
- the first ridge can be centrally located on the first surface
- the second ridge cam be centrally located on the second surface.
- the first ridge extends from one edge to an opposite edge of the first surface
- the second ridge extends from one edge to an opposite edge of the second surface.
- the first ridge can be coplanar with the first leg when the first end is attached to the first leg
- the second ridge can be coplanar with the second leg when the second end is attached to the second leg.
- the first end can include a concavity in a surface opposite the body
- the second end can include a concavity in a surface opposite the body.
- the invention provides a kit for preparing a form for filling a hollow cavity preparation in a tooth.
- the kit includes at least one sectional dental matrix comprising a curved strip of material.
- the strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the cavity preparation and a surface of the tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the cavity preparation and the surface of the tooth to create the form for filling the cavity preparation.
- the strip has a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface.
- the kit also includes at least one separate dental matrix stabilizer including an elongated elastic body having a first end portion, a second opposite end portion, a middle portion connecting the first end portion and the second end portion, and a first side surface.
- the first side surface of the body includes a first outwardly extending protrusion on the first end portion, and the first side surface of the body further includes a second outwardly extending protrusion on the second end portion.
- the dental matrix can have has a first thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a first plane horizontal to the strip that is less than a second thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a second plane horizontal to the strip wherein the second plane is below the first plane.
- the strip of the dental matrix can have a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion, wherein the horizontally concave side surface forming the base portion is not vertically concave, and the horizontally concave side surface forming the upper portion of the dental matrix is vertically concave.
- the strip of the dental matrix can have a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion, and strip thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at planes horizontal to the strip can decrease from lower to upper sections of the upper portion of the strip.
- the first end portion of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer can include an area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a first end surface of the body whereby the first end portion can be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area of material weakness.
- the kit includes a matrix removal tool selected from the group consisting of pliers, tweezers or forceps.
- the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are anatomically shaped for different teeth.
- the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are tooth specific for different teeth.
- the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are tooth type specific for different teeth.
- the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are tooth surface specific for different tooth surfaces.
- the kit may further include a separator ring for separating teeth and/or for creating adaptation pressure on the dental matrix stabilizer and/or the dental matrix.
- the separator ring comprises an elastic metallic body that terminates in a pair of spaced apart clamping ends.
- the clamping ends are dimensioned to separate teeth and/or create adaptation pressure on the dental matrix stabilizer and/or the dental matrix.
- the clamping ends are translucent.
- the kit may further include a set of instructions for using the kit in filling the cavity preparation.
- the kit may further include a set of instructions for preparing the cavity preparation before using the kit.
- the set of instructions can be a disc (such as a DVD or CD) and/or printed materials (such as a book).
- the set of instructions can be a tooth preparation guide for preparing a cavity preparation according to the invention or a guide for restoring a tooth using the method of the invention.
- the kit can include more than one of the dental matrix stabilizer, and at least two of the dental matrix stabilizer are of different size.
- the kit can have a curing light.
- the first outwardly extending protrusion of the dental matrix stabilizer can be spaced inward from a first end surface of the body of the dental matrix stabilizer, and the second outwardly extending protrusion of the dental matrix stabilizer can be spaced inward from a second end surface of the body of the dental matrix stabilizer.
- the body of the dental matrix stabilizer is translucent.
- the material of the curved strip of the dental matrix is translucent.
- the dental matrix comprises a second curved strip of translucent material.
- the second strip can have a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of a second cavity preparation in an adjacent tooth and a surface of the adjacent tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second cavity preparation and the surface of the adjacent tooth to create the form for filling the second cavity preparation.
- the second strip can have a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface wherein the second curved strip is joined to the curved strip.
- the dental matrix can have a second curved strip of translucent material wherein the second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of a second cavity preparation in an adjacent tooth and a surface of the adjacent tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second cavity preparation and the surface of the adjacent tooth to create the form for filling the second cavity preparation.
- the second strip can have a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface wherein the second curved strip and/or the curved strip have at least one throughhole.
- This lateral and or simultaneous curing of a class II composite is an integral and unique feature of the invention.
- the light curing has been based on curing from the occlusal (or chewing surface of the tooth) which requires several incremental layers.
- One of the two sectional matrices are designated as “back to back” and have a contact area specific cut out to allow a tighter contact.
- Non-limiting advantages are that there is only one thickness of material (e.g., MylarTM) between the approximating teeth which allows a tighter contact area; and also to avoid collapsing or buckling of one of the two rounded matrices where one of the two matrices will invert and create an undesirable concavity on the outer surface. This situation is uniquely critical to a MylarTM type matrix but will also be beneficial to a metal version of the matrix.
- Previous systems create flat spots and a lack of bulbousness to the outer surface of the filling that encourage bacterial colonization and food impaction which is a pervasive problem in dentistry today.
- a completely convex filling surface that is naturally smooth from the resultant ideal anatomic shape of the matrix has inherent health benefits because of improved self cleansing and better action and access for a toothbrush and floss. Once the composite is trimmed back to fit the tooth, the surface loses its luster and smoothness and rarely is it polished back to the mirror like finish of composite that is injected against these matrix and then left untouched.
- Previous systems are classified simply as anterior or posterior tooth specific.
- the system of the invention because it is truly anatomic, is specific to each tooth or tooth type. For example, in some instances it will be specific to the mesial or distal (right side or left side of front teeth, front or back for back teeth) of the tooth. This is important because teeth have unique shapes that are specific to each tooth and each “side” of the tooth. For example the mesial of an upper incisor is significantly flatter than the distal surface. Because of the specificity of the system this feature is required. Significant adaptation and forming of generically shaped, non anatomic matrices is currently the standard.
- the occlusal and deep interproximal are prepared and then filled.
- the interproximal is prepared or re-prepared with the ideal saucer or slice shape so that the cavity configuration will allow for the ideal “C factor” (cavity configuration factor) and so that is never deeper than two millimeters in the axial dimension.
- the injection molding, single load technique can be utilized with the components of the system of the invention.
- a C Factor cavity configuration factor
- Typical C factors for traditional class II cavity preparations are in the range of 2/1 or 3/1 or higher. The higher the C factor, the greater the risk that areas of composite will pull away from a tooth surface during polymerization leaving a resulting gap; or creating stress to the tooth causing enamel fractures and/or post-operative symptoms.
- the unique preparation design, restorative protocol and kit for filling and finishing are interdependent on each aspect to create a significant advancement in this procedure.
- the final outcome is a tooth that will be less weakened and therefore more fracture resistant.
- the C factor is mitigated, and marginal integrity and filling strength are greatly improved with the method.
- the curing light is simultaneously directed at the top surface of the tooth, at a buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- Buccal-Lingual curing of a Class II restoration is unique to this advancement, heretofore has been from largely from the occlusal.
- This overall system allows for a non mechanical undercut cavity and instead relies on adhesion to enamel rods (pores of the enamel opened up during conditioning/etching of enamel) and the filling is retained with the same robust and permanent adhesion enjoyed by cosmetic veneering of front teeth which have no mechanical retention, only enamel adhesion.
- FIG. 1 is a top view of the light curing step of a tooth restoration method according to the invention.
- FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line 2 - 2 of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 3 is a top perspective view of the matrix insertion step of the method according to the invention.
- FIG. 4 is a top perspective view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer insertion step of the method according to the invention.
- FIG. 5 is a top perspective view of the ring separator insertion step of the method according to the invention.
- FIG. 6 is a top perspective view of the beginning of the light curing step of the method according to the invention.
- FIG. 7 is a top perspective view of the light curing step of the method according to the invention.
- FIG. 8 is a detailed view taken along line 8 - 8 of FIG. 7 showing an alternative separator ring according to the invention.
- FIG. 9 is a top view of one embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 10 is a side cross-sectional view of a dental matrix according to the invention.
- FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view of another dental matrix according to the invention.
- FIG. 12 is a top view of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12A is a top view of another version of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12 AA is a view of the light curing device of FIG. 12A taken along line 12 AA- 12 AA of FIG. 12A .
- FIG. 12B is a top view of the light curing device of FIG. 12A showing the light guides in phantom in their flexed position.
- FIG. 12C is a top view of yet another version of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12D is a top view of still another version of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12E is a bottom view of yet another version of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12F is a side view of the light curing device of FIG. 12E .
- FIG. 12G is a top view of yet another version of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12H is a side view of still another version of a light curing device according to the invention.
- FIG. 12I is a view of the light curing device of FIG. 12H taken along line 12 I- 12 I of FIG. 12H .
- FIG. 13 is a top view of another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the dental matrix of FIG. 10 taken along line 14 - 14 of FIG. 10 .
- FIG. 15 is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15B is a top view of still another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15C is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15B .
- FIG. 15D is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15E is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15D .
- FIG. 15F is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15D .
- FIG. 15G is a top view of still another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15H is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15G .
- FIG. 15I is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15G .
- FIG. 15J is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15K is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15J .
- FIG. 15L is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15J .
- FIG. 15M is a top view of still another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15N is a cross-sectional view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15M taken along line 15 N- 15 N of FIG. 15M .
- FIG. 15O is a bottom view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15M .
- FIG. 15P is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15M .
- FIG. 15Q is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention.
- FIG. 15R is a cross-sectional view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15Q taken along line 15 R- 15 R of FIG. 15Q .
- FIG. 15S is a bottom view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15Q .
- FIG. 15T is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer of FIG. 15Q .
- FIG. 16 is a top perspective view of another dental matrix according to the invention.
- FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix of FIG. 16 taken along line 17 - 17 of FIG. 16 .
- FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix of FIGS. 16 and 17 taken along line 18 - 18 of FIG. 17 .
- FIG. 19 is a top perspective view of yet another dental matrix according to the invention.
- FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix of FIG. 19 taken along line 20 - 20 of FIG. 19 .
- FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix of FIGS. 19 and 20 taken along line 21 - 21 of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view, similar to FIG. 21 , of yet another dental matrix according to the invention.
- FIG. 23 is a top perspective view of still another dental matrix according to the invention.
- FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix of FIG. 23 taken along line 24 - 24 of FIG. 23 .
- FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the use of another alternative separator ring according to the invention.
- FIG. 26 is a bottom view of the separator ring shown in FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 27 is a front view of the separator ring shown in FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 28 is a side view of the separator ring shown in FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 29 is a top view of three adjacent teeth having three different cavity preparations.
- FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of a tooth of FIG. 29 taken along line 30 - 30 of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view of a tooth of FIG. 29 taken along line 31 - 31 of FIG. 29 .
- FIGS. 1-8 there is shown various steps and devices in an example method according to the invention for the restoration of a tooth.
- the dentist locates a tooth having a cavity.
- FIG. 3 there is shown a tooth 12 having a top occlusal surface 14 and an interproximal side surface 16 .
- a hollow cavity preparation 18 has been prepared in tooth 12 .
- the hollow cavity preparation 18 includes an inner surface 19 , a side surface 20 , an opposite side surface 21 and a bottom surface 22 .
- Dr. G. V. Black Using the well known classification system developed by Dr. G. V. Black in 1908, this would be a Class II cavity involving the interproximal side surface 16 and top occlusal surface 14 of tooth 12 , which may be a premolar or molar.
- the Class II cavity preparation 18 of FIG. 3 is saucer shaped when viewed from above and does not have the usual box-like shape of a conventional Class II cavity preparation. Specifically, the ends 17 a , 17 b of the cavity preparation 18 are not tangential to the tooth outside surface. Also, the cavity preparation 18 does not extend inward more than two millimeters inward from the interproximal side surface 16 .
- a wedge (not shown) is inserted between the interproximal surface 16 of the tooth 12 and the interproximal surface 26 of adjacent tooth 24 to create a gap between the tooth 12 and the tooth 24 .
- Known wedges are suitable for this “pre-wedging” step.
- the wedge is removed, and a sectional anatomic translucent anatomic dental matrix 30 is inserted between the tooth 12 and the tooth 24 as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4 .
- the dental matrix 30 will be described in further detail below.
- the clear plastic anatomical sectional matrix 30 is placed around the tooth 12 maintaining anatomic root adaptation contact using an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 according to the invention.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 will be described in further detail below.
- a metallic elastic separator ring 78 is then placed in the interproximal embrasure to create slight tooth separation and additional adaptation pressure on the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 and/or the matrix 30 .
- the cavity preparation 18 in tooth 12 is then etched with liquid and/or gel phosphoric acid, about 2 millimeters past the margins.
- the cavity preparation 18 in tooth 12 is then rinsed and dried.
- a lightly filled or unfilled light curable resin tooth bonding agent is then applied to tooth 12 covering the entire cavity preparation 18 and about 0.5-1.5 millimeters past the margins.
- the resin tooth bonding agent is then air thinned except on surface 22 where a small pool of resin tooth bonding agent is maintained.
- the resin tooth bonding agent is not light cured at this point.
- Resin tooth bonding agents improve composite to enamel and/or dentin bonding.
- One example resin tooth bonding agent is available under the tradename OptiBond Solo Plus®.
- a light curable flowable composite resin is then injected directly into the pool of resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible) without incorporating bubbles. A tiny amount of the light curable flowable composite resin is expressed before placement to ensure that there is no air in the cannula.
- the light curable flowable composite and resin tooth bonding agent are not light cured at this point.
- light curable flowable composite resins contain 20-25 percent less filler in the light curable polymeric material than nonflowable paste materials.
- Light curable flowable composite resins are available under tradenames such as FiltekTM, Flow-ItTM, EsthetX®, Revolution®, AeliteFlo®, PermaFlo®, Dyract Flow®, Tetric®, and Heliomolar®. Light curable resins are preferred as light cured resins are more color stable than chemically cured resins.
- a light curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent without creating air bubbles, allowing the composite resin to displace most of the lesser filled flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible).
- Composite resins are available under tradenames such as 3M Z100TM, 3M Filtek SupremeTM, and Prodigy®. The next steps are burnishing, carving the anatomy and carving excess composite. There is no need to use a condenser or plugger.
- the top occlusal surface 14 of the filled cavity preparation is then cured using a curing light such as high intensity light emitting diode (LED) lights, plasma-arc curing lights, halogen lights, and laser lights.
- a curing light such as high intensity light emitting diode (LED) lights, plasma-arc curing lights, halogen lights, and laser lights.
- the interproximal region of the filled cavity preparation is cured using a dental curing light 80 with a light guide having two separate distal sections that allow for simultaneous curing of the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the filled cavity preparation while applying air cooling from an air syringe or one curing light according to the invention.
- lateral light curing is used.
- two individual curing lights can be used.
- the separator ring 78 and interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 are then removed and the simultaneous curing of the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the filled cavity preparation is then repeated using the dental curing light 80 that will be described in further detail below.
- the matrix 30 is then removed, and the restored tooth 12 is polished with discs, strips, and rubber tipped and carbide burs.
- a base material such as a flowable composite, a glass ionomer material or a paste composite resin
- a lightly filled or unfilled light curable resin tooth bonding agent is then applied to the cured base material in the cavity preparation 18 and about 0.5-1.5 millimeters past the margins.
- the resin tooth bonding agent is then air thinned except on surface 22 where a small pool of resin tooth bonding agent is maintained. The resin tooth bonding agent is not light cured at this point.
- a light curable flowable composite resin is then injected directly into the pool of resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible) without incorporating bubbles. A tiny amount of the light curable flowable composite resin is expressed before placement to ensure that there is no air in the cannula. The light curable flowable composite and resin tooth bonding agent are not light cured at this point.
- a light curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent without creating air bubbles, allowing the composite resin to displace most of the lesser filled flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible). The next steps are burnishing, carving the anatomy and carving excess composite. The light curing process then proceeds as above.
- the dental matrix 30 includes a curved strip 32 of translucent material.
- the dental matrix 30 can be formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- One non-limiting example material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- the strip 32 has a length running from a first end 34 to a second end 36 of the dental matrix 30 .
- the length of the dental matrix 30 is sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction 23 L of the interproximal cavity preparation 18 and an interproximal surface 16 of the tooth 12 and to extend beyond a second vertical junction 23 R of the interproximal cavity preparation 18 and the interproximal surface 16 of the tooth 12 to create the form for filling the interproximal cavity preparation 18 .
- the strip 32 of the dental matrix 30 has a horizontally concave side surface 38 and a horizontally convex side surface 40 (see FIG. 10 ).
- the concave side surface 38 and the convex side surface 40 extend from the first end 34 to the second end 36 of the dental matrix 30 .
- the strip 32 of the dental matrix 30 also has a base portion 42 and an upper portion 44 integral with and extending upward from the base portion 42 of the dental matrix 30 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 38 forming the base portion 42 is not vertically concave (that is, a cross-section of the base portion 42 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 46 of the dental matrix 30 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 38 forming the upper portion 44 of the dental matrix 30 is vertically concave. See FIG. 10 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 38 is anatomic in that the horizontally concave side surface 38 has an inner surface that that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being
- the matrix 30 is anatomically shaped.
- the matrix 30 can be tooth specific.
- teeth specific it is meant that the matrix is configured to conform to the shape of the outer surface of the specific natural tooth being restored such as (without limitation) an upper right second molar.
- the matrix 30 can be tooth type specific.
- teeth type specific it is meant that the matrix is configured to conform to the shape of the outer surface of the specific type of natural tooth being restored such as (without limitation) an upper molar.
- the matrix 30 can be tooth surface specific.
- teeth surface specific it is meant that the matrix is configured to conform to the shape of the outer surface of the specific natural tooth surface being restored such as (without limitation) an upper right first molar mesial surface.
- FIG. 11 there is shown another embodiment of a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix 30 A.
- the strip thickness between the concave side surface 38 A and the convex side surface 40 A at planes horizontal to the strip 32 A decreases from lower to upper sections of the strip 32 A.
- the clear plastic anatomical matrix 30 A has variable thickness to allow the thinner portion for the tooth contact area and the thicker portion at the gingival area.
- the tapering (decrease in thickness) of the strip 32 A can begin at any location above the bottom surface 46 A of the strip 32 A. However, in one version of the strip 32 A, the tapering of thickness begins in the upper portion 44 A. In other words, the base portion 42 A has uniform thickness.
- the dental matrix 30 A can be formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- One non-limiting example material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- FIG. 14 there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix 30 B.
- the strip 32 B has a first side surface 38 B and a second side surface 40 B.
- the first side surface 38 B has an intermediate horizontally convex section 47 B between a first horizontally concave section 49 A and a second horizontally concave section 49 B.
- the intermediate horizontally convex section 47 B provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward furcation and/or fluting from decay due to the age of the patient.
- the intermediate horizontally convex section 47 B can begin at any location above the bottom surface of the strip 32 B.
- the dental matrix 30 B can be formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- One non-limiting example material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 having a first end portion 51 , a second opposite end portion 52 , a middle portion 53 connecting the first end portion 51 and the second end portion 52 , a first side surface 54 , a second side surface 55 , a top surface 56 and a bottom surface 57 .
- the first end portion 51 has a first throughhole 58 extending from the top surface 56 to the bottom surface 57 of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- the second end portion 52 has a second throughhole 59 extending from the top surface 56 to the bottom surface 57 of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- the first end portion 51 includes an area 61 of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 and extends toward the bottom surface 57 and extends toward a first end surface 62 of the body 50 .
- the area 61 of material weakness extends from the first throughhole 58 to the first end surface 62 of the body 50 . This allows the first end portion 51 to be separated into separate end members 63 , 64 by application of a separation force at the area 61 of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- end members 63 , 64 have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the area 61 of material weakness can be formed with a material of lower shear strength than the other material of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 , or can be formed by including perforations or other like open areas in the area 61 of material weakness.
- the second end portion 52 includes an area 65 of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 and extends toward the bottom surface 57 and extends toward a second end surface 66 of the body 50 .
- the area 65 of material weakness extends from the second throughhole 59 to the second end surface 66 of the body 50 . This allows the second end portion 52 to be separated into separate end members 67 , 68 by application of a separation force at the area 65 of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- end members 67 , 68 have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the area 65 of material weakness can be formed with a material of lower shear strength than the other material of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 , or can be formed by including perforations or other like open areas in the area 65 of material weakness.
- the top surface 56 of the body 50 of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 includes a first pair of upper side-by-side depressions 71 f , 71 b in the middle portion 53 of the body 50
- the bottom surface 57 of the body 50 includes a second pair of analogous lower side-by-side depressions (not shown) in the middle portion of the body.
- the first pair of upper side-by-side depressions 71 f , 71 b include inwardly curved inner surfaces 73 f , 73 b
- the second pair of lower side-by-side depressions (not shown) include analogous inwardly curved inner surfaces (not shown).
- the first side surface 54 of the body 50 includes a curved protrusion 75 f located near the first throughhole 58 and a curved protrusion 76 f located near the second throughhole 59 .
- the second side surface 55 of the body 50 includes a curved protrusion 75 b located near the first throughhole 58 and a curved protrusion 76 b located near the second throughhole 59 .
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone elastomer or a polyurethane elastomer.
- an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 A which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 A having a first end portion 51 A, a second opposite end portion 52 A, a middle portion 53 A connecting the first end portion 51 A and the second end portion 52 A, a first side surface 54 A, a second side surface 55 A, a top surface 56 A and a bottom surface (not shown).
- the first end portion 51 A has a first throughhole 58 A extending from the top surface 56 A to the bottom surface of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 A.
- the second end portion 52 A has a second throughhole 59 A extending from the top surface 56 A to the bottom surface of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 A.
- the first end portion 51 A includes an area 61 A of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 A and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward a first end surface 62 A of the body 50 A.
- the area 61 A of material weakness extends from the first throughhole 58 A to the first end surface 62 A of the body 50 A. This allows the first end portion 51 A to be separated into separate end members 63 A, 64 A by application of a separation force at the area 61 A of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 A.
- end members 63 A, 64 A have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the second end portion 52 A includes an area 65 A of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 A and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward a second end surface 66 A of the body 50 A.
- the area 65 A of material weakness extends from the second throughhole 59 A to the second end surface 66 A of the body 50 A. This allows the second end portion 52 A to be separated into separate end members 67 A, 68 A by application of a separation force at the area 65 A of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 A.
- end members 67 A, 68 A have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the first side surface 54 A of the body 50 A includes a curved protrusion 75 f located near the first throughhole 58 A and a curved protrusion 76 f located near the second throughhole 59 A.
- the second side surface 55 A of the body 50 A includes a curved protrusion 75 b located near the first throughhole 58 A and a curved protrusion 76 b located near the second throughhole 59 A.
- the first side surface 54 A of the body 50 A includes a first curved protrusion 77 f located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body 50 A.
- the second side surface 55 A of the body 50 A includes a second curved protrusion 77 b located near the intermediate vertical plane of the body 50 A.
- the curved protrusions 77 f , 77 b are beneficial when used with dental matrix 30 B having the intermediate horizontally convex section 47 B that provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward decay due to the age of the patient.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 A can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 B which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 B having a first end portion 51 B, a second opposite end portion 52 B, a middle portion 53 B connecting the first end portion 51 B and the second end portion 52 B, a first side surface 54 B, a second side surface 55 B, a top surface 56 B and a bottom surface (not shown).
- an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 B having a first end portion 51 B, a second opposite end portion 52 B, a middle portion 53 B connecting the first end portion 51 B and the second end portion 52 B, a first side surface 54 B, a second side surface 55 B, a top surface 56 B and a bottom surface (not shown).
- the first end portion 51 B includes an area 61 B of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 B and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward a first end surface 62 B of the body 50 B.
- the area 61 B of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the first end portion 51 B to the first end surface 62 B of the body 50 B. This allows the first end portion 51 B to be separated into separate end members 63 B, 64 B by application of a separation force at the area 61 B of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 B.
- end members 63 B, 64 B have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the second end portion 52 B includes an area 65 B of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 B and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward a second end surface 66 B of the body 50 B.
- the area 65 B of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the second end portion 52 B to the second end surface 66 B of the body 50 B. This allows the second end portion 52 B to be separated into separate end members 67 B, 68 B by application of a separation force at the area 65 B of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 B.
- end members 67 B, 68 B have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- the first side surface 54 B of the body 50 B includes a curved protrusion 75 f and a curved protrusion 76 f .
- the second side surface 55 B of the body 50 B includes a curved protrusion 75 b and a curved protrusion 76 b.
- the first side surface 54 B of the body 50 B includes a first curved protrusion 77 f located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body 50 B.
- the second side surface 55 B of the body 50 B includes a second curved protrusion 77 b located near the intermediate vertical plane of the body 50 B.
- the curved protrusions 77 f , 77 b are beneficial when used with dental matrix 30 B having the intermediate horizontally convex section 47 B that provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward decay due to the age of the patient.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 B can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 d which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 d having a first end portion 51 d , a second opposite end portion 52 d , a middle portion 53 d connecting the first end portion 51 d and the second end portion 52 d , a first side surface 54 d , a second side surface 55 d , a top surface 56 d and a bottom surface 57 d .
- the first end portion 51 d extends to a first end surface 62 d of the body 50 d .
- the second end portion 52 d extends to a second end surface 66 d of the body 50 d .
- the top surface 56 d may include indicia 65 d that indicate which side is placed upward away from the gingival during use.
- the first side surface 54 d of the body 50 d includes a curved protrusion 75 f and a curved protrusion 76 f .
- the second side surface 55 d of the body 50 d includes a curved protrusion 75 b and a curved protrusion 76 b.
- the first side surface 54 d of the body 50 d includes a first curved protrusion 77 f located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body 50 d .
- the second side surface 55 d of the body 50 d includes a second curved protrusion 77 b located near the intermediate vertical plane of the body 50 d .
- the curved protrusions 77 f , 77 b are beneficial when used with dental matrix 30 B having the intermediate horizontally convex section 47 B that provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward decay due to the age of the patient.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 d can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the top surface 56 d of the body 50 d of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 d includes a first pair of upper side-by-side depressions 171 f , 171 b in the middle portion 53 d of the body 50 d .
- the first pair of upper side-by-side depressions 171 f , 171 b include inwardly curved inner surfaces 173 f , 173 b .
- the bottom surface 57 d of the body 50 d of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 d includes a lower concavity 171 L in the middle portion 53 d of the body 50 d .
- the lower concavity 171 L limits the application of undesired pressure on the interdental gingival when the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 d is positioned between a patient's teeth.
- FIGS. 15D to 15F there is shown another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 e which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 e having a disc shaped first end portion 51 e , a disc shaped second opposite end portion 52 e , a middle portion 53 e connecting the first end portion 51 e and the second end portion 52 e , a first side surface 54 e , a second side surface 55 e , a top surface 56 e and a bottom surface 57 e .
- the first end portion 51 e extends to a first end surface 58 e of the body 50 e .
- the second end portion 52 e extends to a second end surface 59 e of the body 50 e .
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 e can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the middle portion 53 e includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) first section 61 e , a first intermediate section 62 e , a central rod-like section 63 e , a second intermediate section 64 e , and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) second section 65 e .
- the section of the first side surface 54 e that is part of the first section 61 e extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 e to the first intermediate section 62 e .
- the section of the first side surface 54 e that is part of the first intermediate section 62 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the first side surface 54 e that is part of the second section 65 e extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 e to the second intermediate section 64 e .
- the section of the first side surface 54 e that is part of the second intermediate section 64 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e.
- the section of the second side surface 55 e that is part of the first section 61 e extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 e to the first intermediate section 62 e .
- the section of the second side surface 55 e that is part of the first intermediate section 62 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the second side surface 55 e that is part of the second section 65 e extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 e to the second intermediate section 64 e .
- the section of the second side surface 55 e that is part of the second intermediate section 64 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e.
- the section of the top surface 56 e that is part of the first section 61 e extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 e to the first intermediate section 62 e and through part of the first intermediate section 62 e .
- the section of the top surface 56 e that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the top surface 56 e that is part of the second section 65 e extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 e to the second intermediate section 64 e and through part of the second intermediate section 64 e .
- the section of the top surface 56 e that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e.
- the section of the bottom surface 57 e that is part of the first section 61 e extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 e to the first intermediate section 62 e and through part of the first intermediate section 62 e .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 e that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the bottom surface 57 e that is part of the second section 65 e extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 e to the second intermediate section 64 e and through part of the second intermediate section 64 e .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 e that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e.
- the body 50 e includes an area 66 e of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 e and extends toward the bottom surface 57 e and extends to the first end surface 58 e of the body 50 e .
- the area 66 e of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the first intermediate section 62 e to the first end surface 58 e of the body 50 e . This allows the first end portion 51 e , the first section 61 e and part of the first intermediate section 62 e to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 66 e of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 e .
- the body 50 e includes an area 67 e of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 e and extends toward the bottom surface 57 e and extends to the second end surface 59 e of the body 50 e .
- the area 67 e of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the second intermediate section 64 e to the second end surface 59 e of the body 50 e . This allows the second end portion 52 e , the second section 65 e and part of the second intermediate section 64 e to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 67 e of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 e.
- an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 f which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 f having a disc shaped first end portion 51 f , a disc shaped second opposite end portion 52 f , a middle portion 53 f connecting the first end portion 51 f and the second end portion 52 f , a first side surface 54 f , a second side surface 55 f , a top surface 56 f and a bottom surface 57 f .
- the first end portion 51 f extends to a first end surface 58 f of the body 50 f .
- the second end portion 52 f extends to a second end surface 59 f of the body 50 f .
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 f can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the middle portion 53 f includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) first section 61 f , a first intermediate section 62 f , a central section 63 f , a second intermediate section 64 f , and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) second section 65 f .
- the section of the first side surface 54 f that is part of the first section 61 f extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 f to the first intermediate section 62 f .
- the section of the first side surface 54 f that is part of the first intermediate section 62 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 f which has cylindrical end sections 163 f , 363 f on both sides of a generally spherical center section 263 f .
- the section of the first side surface 54 f that is part of the second section 65 f extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 f to the second intermediate section 64 f .
- the section of the first side surface 54 f that is part of the second intermediate section 64 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 f.
- the section of the second side surface 55 f that is part of the first section 61 f extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 f to the first intermediate section 62 f .
- the section of the second side surface 55 f that is part of the first intermediate section 62 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 f which has cylindrical end sections 163 f , 363 f on both sides of a generally spherical center section 263 f .
- the section of the second side surface 55 f that is part of the second section 65 f extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 f to the second intermediate section 64 f .
- the section of the second side surface 55 f that is part of the second intermediate section 64 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 f.
- the section of the top surface 56 f that is part of the first section 61 f extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 f to the first intermediate section 62 f and through part of the first intermediate section 62 f .
- the section of the top surface 56 f that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 f .
- the section of the top surface 56 f that is part of the second section 65 f extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 f to the second intermediate section 64 f and through part of the second intermediate section 64 f .
- the section of the top surface 56 f that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 f.
- the section of the bottom surface 57 f that is part of the first section 61 f extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 f to the first intermediate section 62 f and through part of the first intermediate section 62 f .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 f that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 f .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 f that is part of the second section 65 f extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 f to the second intermediate section 64 f and through part of the second intermediate section 64 f .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 f that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 f.
- the body 50 f includes an area 66 f of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 f and extends toward the bottom surface 57 f and extends to the first end surface 58 f of the body 50 f .
- the area 66 f of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the first intermediate section 62 f to the first end surface 58 f of the body 50 f . This allows the first end portion 51 f , the first section 61 e and part of the first intermediate section 62 f to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 66 f of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 f .
- the body 50 f includes an area 67 f of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 f and extends toward the bottom surface 57 f and extends to the second end surface 59 f of the body 50 f .
- the area 67 f of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the second intermediate section 64 f to the second end surface 59 f of the body 50 f . This allows the second end portion 52 f , the second section 65 f and part of the second intermediate section 64 f to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 67 f of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 f.
- an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 g which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 g having a disc shaped first end portion 51 g , a disc shaped second opposite end portion 52 g , a middle portion 53 g connecting the first end portion 51 g and the second end portion 52 g , a first side surface 54 g , a second side surface 55 g , a top surface 56 g and a bottom surface 57 g .
- the first end portion 51 g extends to a first end surface 58 g of the body 50 g .
- the second end portion 52 g extends to a second end surface 59 g of the body 50 g .
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 g can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the middle portion 53 g includes a generally cylindrical first section 61 g , a first spherical intermediate section 62 g , a central cylindrical section 63 g , a second spherical intermediate section 64 g , and a generally cylindrical second section 65 g.
- FIGS. 15M to 15P there is shown another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 h having a generally disc shaped first end portion 51 h , a generally disc shaped second opposite end portion 52 h , a middle portion 53 h connecting the first end portion 51 h and the second end portion 52 h , a first side surface 54 h , a second side surface 55 h , a top surface 56 h and a bottom surface 57 h .
- the first end portion 51 h extends to a first end surface 58 h of the body 50 h .
- the second end portion 52 h extends to a second end surface 59 h of the body 50 h .
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the middle portion 53 h includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) first section 61 h , a first intermediate section 62 h , a central rod-like section 63 h , a second intermediate section 64 h , and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) second section 65 h .
- the section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of the first section 61 h extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 h to the first intermediate section 62 h .
- the section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of the first intermediate section 62 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of the second section 65 h extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 h to the second intermediate section 64 h .
- the section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of the second intermediate section 64 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h.
- the section of the second side surface 55 h that is part of the first section 61 h extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 h to the first intermediate section 62 h .
- the section of the second side surface 55 h that is part of the first intermediate section 62 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the second side surface 55 h that is part of the second section 65 h extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 h to the second intermediate section 64 h .
- the section of the second side surface 55 h that is part of the second intermediate section 64 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h.
- the section of the top surface 56 h that is part of the first section 61 h extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 h to the first intermediate section 62 h and through part of the first intermediate section 62 h .
- the section of the top surface 56 h that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 h extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the top surface 56 h that is part of the second section 65 h extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 h to the second intermediate section 64 h and through part of the second intermediate section 64 h .
- the section of the top surface 56 h that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 h extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h.
- the section of the bottom surface 57 h that is part of the first section 61 h extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 h to the first intermediate section 62 h and through part of the first intermediate section 62 h .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 h that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 h extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h which is tapered inward near its center.
- the section of the bottom surface 57 h that is part of the second section 65 h extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 h to the second intermediate section 64 h and through part of the second intermediate section 64 h .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 h that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 h.
- the body 50 h includes an area 66 h of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 h and extends toward the bottom surface 57 h and extends to the first end surface 58 h of the body 50 h .
- the area 66 h of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the first intermediate section 62 h to the first end surface 58 h of the body 50 h . This allows the first end portion 51 h , the first section 61 h and part of the first intermediate section 62 h to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 66 h of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h .
- the body 50 h includes an area 67 h of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 h and extends toward the bottom surface 57 h and extends to the second end surface 59 h of the body 50 h .
- the area 67 h of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the second intermediate section 64 h to the second end surface 59 h of the body 50 h . This allows the second end portion 52 h , the second section 65 h and part of the second intermediate section 64 h to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 67 h of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h there is an inward concavity 71 h in the bottom surface 57 h in an inward section of the first intermediate section 62 h , the central section 63 h , and an inward section of the second intermediate section 64 h .
- the inward concavity 71 h has a longitudinal axis X and a lateral axis Y transverse to the longitudinal axis X.
- the longitudinal axis X extend toward the first end portion 51 h and the second end portion 52 h .
- the longitudinal axis X is longer than the lateral axis Y.
- the 71 h limits the application of undesired pressure on the interdental gingival when the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h is positioned between a patient's teeth. Also, the first end portion 51 h has a flat bottom surface 76 h , and the second end portion 52 h has a flat bottom surface 77 h.
- an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 i which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent) elastic body 50 i having a generally disc shaped first end portion 51 i , a generally disc shaped second opposite end portion 52 i , a middle portion 53 i connecting the first end portion 51 i and the second end portion 52 i , a first side surface 54 i , a second side surface 55 i , a top surface 56 i and a bottom surface 57 i .
- the first end portion 51 i extends to a first end surface 58 i of the body 50 i .
- the second end portion 52 i extends to a second end surface 59 i of the body 50 i .
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 i can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the middle portion 53 i includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) first section 61 i , a first intermediate section 62 i , a central section 63 i , a second intermediate section 64 i , and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section) second section 65 i .
- the section of the first side surface 54 i that is part of the first section 61 i extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 i to the first intermediate section 62 i .
- the section of the first side surface 54 i that is part of the first intermediate section 62 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 i which has cylindrical end sections 163 i , 363 i on both sides of a generally spherical center section 263 i .
- the section of the first side surface 54 i that is part of the second section 65 i extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 i to the second intermediate section 64 i .
- the section of the first side surface 54 i that is part of the second intermediate section 64 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 i.
- the section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the first section 61 i extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 i to the first intermediate section 62 i .
- the section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the first intermediate section 62 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from the first section 61 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central section 63 i which has cylindrical end sections 163 i , 363 i on both sides of a generally spherical center section 263 i .
- the section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the second section 65 i extends inward linearly from the second end portion 52 i to the second intermediate section 64 i .
- the section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the second intermediate section 64 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from the second section 65 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 i.
- the section of the top surface 56 i that is part of the first section 61 i extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 i to the first intermediate section 62 i and through part of the first intermediate section 62 i .
- the section of the top surface 56 i that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 i .
- the section of the top surface 56 i that is part of the second section 65 i extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 i to the second intermediate section 64 i and through part of the second intermediate section 64 i .
- the section of the top surface 56 i that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 i.
- the section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the first section 61 i extends linearly inward from the first end portion 51 i to the first intermediate section 62 i and through part of the first intermediate section 62 i .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the inward section of the first intermediate section 62 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 i .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the second section 65 i extends linearly inward from the second end portion 52 i to the second intermediate section 64 i and through part of the second intermediate section 64 i .
- the section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the inward section of the second intermediate section 64 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to the central tubular section 63 i.
- the body 50 i includes an area 66 i of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 i and extends toward the bottom surface 57 i and extends to the first end surface 58 i of the body 50 i .
- the area 66 i of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the first intermediate section 62 i to the first end surface 58 i of the body 50 i . This allows the first end portion 51 i , the first section 61 i and part of the first intermediate section 62 i to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 66 i of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 i .
- the body 50 i includes an area 67 i of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56 i and extends toward the bottom surface 57 i and extends to the second end surface 59 i of the body 50 i .
- the area 67 i of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the second intermediate section 64 i to the second end surface 59 i of the body 50 i . This allows the second end portion 52 i the second section 65 i and part of the second intermediate section 64 i to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area 67 i of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 i.
- the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 i there is an inward concavity 71 i in the bottom surface 57 i in an inward section of the first intermediate section 62 i , the central section 63 i , and an inward section of the second intermediate section 64 i .
- the 71 i limits the application of undesired pressure on the interdental gingival when the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 h is positioned between a patient's teeth.
- the first end portion 51 i has a flat bottom surface 76 i
- the second end portion 52 i has a flat bottom surface 77 i.
- FIGS. 4-8 the placement of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 is shown during a method according to the invention for the restoration of a tooth.
- the dentist stretches the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 .
- the dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be stretched by inserting the ends of a pliers in the first throughhole 58 and the second throughhole 59 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 and opening the ends of the pliers.
- the dentist can grab and pull apart the end portions 51 and 52 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 .
- the stretching of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 leads to a thinning of the middle portion 53 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 such that the dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be inserted between teeth 12 and 24 by movement in direction C of FIG. 4 .
- the dental matrix stabilizer 48 then biases the base portion 42 of the dental matrix 30 against the tooth 12 as shown in FIG. 5 .
- the dentist separates the first end portion 51 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 into separate end members 63 , 64 by application of a separation force at the area 61 of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- the dentist separates the second end portion 52 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 into separate end members 67 , 68 by application of a separation force at the area 65 of material weakness of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- the dentist then flexes the separator ring 78 open and then places the ends 79 of the separator ring 78 between the separate end members 63 , 64 and separate end members 67 , 68 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 .
- the end member 63 biases the base portion 42 of the dental matrix 30 against the tooth 12 and the end member 64 contacts the base of the tooth 24 .
- the end member 67 biases the base portion 42 of the dental matrix 30 against the tooth 12 and the end member 68 contacts the base of the tooth 24 .
- two separator rings can be used with one separator ring applying adaptation pressure on the dental matrix 30 and the other separator ring applying adaptation pressure on the dental matrix stabilizer.
- the dental matrix stabilizers 48 A, 48 B, 48 d , 48 e , 48 f , 48 g , 48 h can be placed in a similar manner.
- no pliers is needed for placing dental matrix stabilizer 48 B of FIG. 15 as the dentist can grab and pull apart the end portions 51 B and 52 B of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 B in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 when placing dental matrix stabilizer 48 B.
- the areas of material weakness 61 , 61 A, 61 B, 65 , 65 A, 65 B of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizers 48 , 48 A and 48 B may not be present in the interproximal dental matrix stabilizers 48 , 48 A and 48 B.
- the dentist can separate the first end portion and the second end portion of the dental matrix stabilizers 48 , 48 A, 48 B into separate end members (if desired) by cutting along a line marked at 61 and 65 in FIG. 9 .
- FIG. 8 alternative ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B, are shown on a separator ring 78 A having an elastic ring 79 C.
- the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B, of separator ring 78 A are spaced apart such that end 79 B can be placed between the separate end members 63 , 64 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 and the end 79 A can bias the upper portion 44 of the dental matrix 30 and the end 79 A 2 can bias the tooth 24 when the separator ring 78 A is placed on the dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B of separator ring 78 A are formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) material to provide for passage of light from the dental curing light 80 .
- the elastic ring 79 C of the separator ring 78 A can be opaque or translucent.
- Suitable materials for the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B of the separator ring 78 A are elastic polymeric materials and suitable materials for the ring 79 C of the separator ring 78 A are polymeric, metallic or composite materials.
- the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B of separator ring 78 A have a recess 79 D that accepts a protrusion 79 E of the elastic ring 79 C in an interference fit such that the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B of separator ring 78 A are removable from the elastic ring 79 C. While the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B of the separator ring 78 A are shown having a generally J-shaped or L-shaped configuration in FIG.
- the ends 79 A, 79 A 2 , 79 B can also have a V-shaped configuration, or any other spaced apart configuration that allows for the application of force to end members of the dental matrix stabilizers 48 , 48 A, 48 B and to the upper portion 44 of the dental matrix 30 when the separator ring 78 A is placed on the dental matrix stabilizer.
- the dental curing light 80 includes an electrical power supply (not shown) and a light source (not shown) in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
- the light source can be a high intensity light emitting diode as is known in the art.
- the dental curing light 80 uses the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials. Single wavelength devices are preferred.
- the dental curing light 80 includes a light guide including a proximal section 82 , a first distal section 84 extending from the proximal section 84 , and a second distal section 86 extending from the proximal section 82 .
- the proximal section 82 is in optical communication with the light source, the first distal section 84 and the second distal section 86 .
- the first distal section 84 has a first distal end 85
- the second distal section 86 has a second distal end 87 .
- the first distal section 84 and the second distal section 86 are formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the first distal section 84 and the second distal section 86 can be bent to emit light in a various selected directions.
- An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane.
- the dental curing light 80 further includes a first light tip 91 having a first base 92 removably connected to the first distal end 85 of the first distal section 84 of the light guide.
- the first light tip 91 includes a first hollow tubular opaque body 93 having a first aperture 94 for emitting light.
- the first body 93 is formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the first hollow body 93 can be bent to emit light in a first selected direction from the first aperture 94 .
- An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane.
- the outside diameter of the first light tip 91 tapers inward from the first base 92 toward the first aperture 94 .
- the first light tip 91 has a recess 105 that accepts a protrusion 106 of the first distal end 85 of the first distal section 84 of the light guide in an interference fit such that the first light tip 91 is removable from the first distal end 85 of the first distal section 84 of the light guide.
- the dental curing light 80 also includes a second light tip 96 having a second base 97 removably connected to the second distal end 87 of the second distal section 86 of the light guide.
- the second light tip 96 includes a second hollow tubular opaque body 98 having a second aperture 99 for emitting light.
- the second body 98 is formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the second hollow body 98 can be bent to emit light in a second selected direction from the second aperture 99 .
- An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane.
- the outside diameter of the second light tip 96 tapers inward from the second base 97 toward the second aperture 99 .
- the second light tip 96 has a recess 115 that accepts a protrusion 116 of the second distal end 87 of the second distal section 86 of the light guide in an interference fit such that the second light tip 96 is removable from second distal end 87 of the second distal section 86 of the light guide.
- the electrical power supply, the light source and the proximal section 82 of the light guide can be encased in a housing 101 .
- the electrical power supply and the light source are encased in the housing 101 and the proximal section 82 of the light guide is at least partially outside the housing 101 .
- the dental curing light 80 can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation, and light is directed from the first light tip 91 of the dental curing light 80 at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- Simultaneously lights is directed from the second light tip 96 of the dental curing light 80 at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- the first light tip 91 and the second light tip 96 can be bent such that light can be directed at the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- the use of light curing is generally preferred over chemical curing as the resulting cured material is color stable.
- the dental curing light 380 includes an electrical power supply 381 (such as an AC power supply or a rechargeable battery or a primary battery) and light sources 382 a , 382 b in electrical communication with the electrical power supply 381 .
- the electrical power supply 381 and the light sources 382 a , 382 b are contained in a housing 401 .
- the light sources 382 a , 382 b can be high intensity light emitting diodes as is known in the art.
- the dental curing light 380 can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials. Plasma arc, halogen, and laser light sources are also suitable.
- the dental curing light 380 includes a first light guide 383 a having a first distal section 384 a and a first distal end 385 a .
- a first light conducting optical fiber bundle (not shown, similar to 386 b ) is contained within a first sleeve of the first light guide 383 a .
- the first light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source 382 a to a transparent or translucent first tip 388 a of the first light guide 383 a .
- the first tip 388 a of the first light guide 383 a can have a 3 millimeter circle diameter and can extend axially about 3 millimeters beyond the sleeve 387 a of the first light guide 383 a.
- the dental curing light 380 also includes a second light guide 383 b having a second distal section 384 b and a second distal end 385 b .
- a second circular light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 b (see FIG. 12 AA) is contained within a second sleeve 387 b of the second light guide 383 b .
- the second light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 b conducts light from the light source 382 b to a transparent or translucent second tip 388 b of the second light guide 383 b .
- the second tip 388 b of the second light guide 383 b can have a 3 millimeter circle diameter and can extend about 3 millimeters beyond the sleeve 387 b of the second light guide 383 b .
- the second tip 388 b extends outward from an integral transparent or translucent disc-like flange 388 t .
- the second light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 b also conducts light from the light source 382 b to the disc-like flange 388 t.
- the first sleeve 387 a and the second sleeve 387 b are formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the first sleeve 387 a and the second sleeve 387 b can be bent to emit light in a various selected directions.
- An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane.
- the first sleeve 387 a and the second sleeve 387 b are formed from a rigid material. Looking at FIG. 12B , the operation of such a dental curing light 380 is shown.
- the light source 382 a and first light guide 383 a are mounted on a hinge assembly such that the light source 382 a and first light guide 383 a may pivot in direction O 1 shown in FIG. 12B .
- the light source 382 b and second light guide 383 b are mounted on a hinge assembly such that the light source 382 b and second light guide 383 b may pivot in direction O 2 shown in FIG. 12B .
- the hinge assemblies are spring-biased inward such that the rest position for the first light guide 383 a and the second light guide 383 b are depicted in full lines in FIG. 12B .
- the first light guide 383 a and the second light guide 383 b are flexed outward against the bias of the hinge assemblies, the first light guide 383 a and the second light guide 383 are in the flexed positions depicted in dashed lines in FIG. 12B .
- the dental curing light 380 can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation.
- the first light guide 383 a and the second light guide 383 b can be flexed outward as described with reference to FIG. 12B , and thereafter the first light guide 383 a and the second light guide 383 b are released such that the first tip 388 a of the dental curing light 380 assumes a position near a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation and the second tip 388 b of the dental curing light 380 assumes a position near a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- the first sleeve 387 a and the second sleeve 387 b comprise flexible materials
- the first sleeve 387 a and the second sleeve 387 b can be bent such that light can be directed at the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation by the first tip 388 a and the second tip 388 b , preferably at a distance of less than 6 millimeters, most preferably at 3-4 millimeters.
- the proximity of the light guides or LEDs can be important as moving as little as 3 millimeters away from the surface affects photon transfer.
- the hinging of the light guides along with the dual surface profiles of the tips allows more intimate positioning than with previous lights.
- the first tip 388 a and the second tip 388 b are about 4 to about 15 millimeters apart.
- the first tip 388 a and the second tip 388 b are most preferably about 4 to about 15 millimeters apart.
- the first tip 388 a and the second tip 388 b are most preferably about 4 to about 15 millimeters apart.
- the dental curing light 380 c includes an electrical power supply 381 c (such as batteries) and light sources 382 c , 382 d in electrical communication by way of lines 3811 , 381 m with the electrical power supply 381 c .
- the light sources 382 c , 382 d can be high intensity light emitting diodes as is known in the art.
- the dental curing light 380 c can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials.
- the electrical power supply 381 c is contained in a housing 401 c .
- the dental curing light 380 c includes a first light guide 383 c having a first distal section 384 c and a first distal end 385 c .
- the dental curing light 380 c also includes a second light guide 383 d having a second distal section 384 d and a second distal end 385 d .
- the light source 382 c is contained in the first distal end 385 c of the first light guide 383 c .
- the light source 382 d is contained in the second distal end 385 d of the second light guide 383 d.
- a first light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 c conducts light from the light source 382 c to a first tip 388 c which can extend about 3 millimeters beyond the sleeve 387 c of the first light guide 383 c .
- a second light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 d conducts light from the light source 382 d to a second tip 388 d which can extend about 3 millimeters beyond the second sleeve 387 d of the second light guide 383 d .
- the first light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 c and the second light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 d may be omitted from the dental curing light 380 c and light may be emitted from the light sources 382 c , 382 d to the tips 388 c , 388 d and directly onto the tooth.
- the light sources 382 c , 382 d near the end of the light guides 383 c , 383 d loss of light intensity and light scattering are minimized.
- the dental curing light 380 d includes an electrical power supply (not shown) and light sources (not shown) in electrical communication with the electrical power supply as in the dental curing light 380 of FIG. 12A .
- the dental curing light 380 d includes a first light guide 383 e having a first distal section 384 e and a first distal end 385 e .
- the dental curing light 380 d also includes a second light guide 383 f having a second distal section 384 f and a second distal end 385 f .
- a first light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source to a first tip 388 e of the first light conducting optical fiber.
- a second light conducting optical fiber conducts light from the light source to a second tip 388 f of the second light conducting optical fiber.
- the dental curing light 380 d there is a fan 391 d that is in fluid communication with a first fluid conduit 392 e and a second fluid conduit 392 f .
- the fan is powered by the electrical power supply. Flowing air from the fan 391 d passes through the first fluid conduit 392 e and exits the first distal end 385 e of the first light guide 383 e .
- Flowing air from the fan 391 d also passes through the second fluid conduit 392 f and exits the second distal end 385 f of the second light guide 383 f .
- the flowing air contacts the tooth to provide a cooling effect. This eliminates heating of the tooth that results from photon collisions with the tooth.
- the dental curing light 380 e includes an electrical power supply (not shown) and light sources (not shown) in electrical communication with the electrical power supply as in the dental curing light 380 of FIG. 12A .
- the dental curing light 380 e includes a first light guide 383 g having a first distal section 384 g and a first distal end 385 g .
- the dental curing light 380 e also includes a second light guide 383 h having a second distal section 384 h and a second distal end 385 h .
- a third light guide 383 j having a third distal section 384 j and a third distal end 385 j .
- a first light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source to a first tip 388 g of the first light conducting optical fiber.
- a second light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source to a second tip 388 h of the second light conducting optical fiber.
- a third light conducting optical fiber conducts light from the light source to an end 388 j of the third light conducting optical fiber.
- the first light guide 383 g and the second light guide 383 h are used to cure buccal and lingual portions of the restorative material as described above with reference to FIG. 12A .
- the third light guide 383 j is used to cure occlusal portions of the restorative material.
- the dental curing light 380 g includes an electrical power supply 381 g (such as batteries) and light sources 382 g , 382 h in electrical communication by way of lines 381 q . 381 r with the electrical power supply 381 g .
- the light sources 382 g , 382 h can be high intensity light emitting diodes as is known in the art.
- the dental curing light 380 g can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials.
- the electrical power supply 381 g is contained in a housing 401 g .
- the dental curing light 380 c includes a first generally L-shaped light guide 383 q having a first distal section 384 q and a first distal end 385 q .
- the dental curing light 380 c also includes a second generally L-shaped light guide 383 r having a second distal section 384 r and a second distal end 385 r .
- the light source 382 g is contained in the first distal end 385 q of the first light guide 383 q .
- the light source 382 h is contained in the second distal end 385 r of the second light guide 383 r.
- a first light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 q conducts light from the light source 382 g to a first tip 388 q .
- the first tip 388 q extends about 3 millimeters beyond the sleeve 387 q of the first light guide 383 q .
- a second light conducting optical fiber 386 r conducts light from the light source 382 h to a second tip 388 r .
- the second tip 388 r of extends about 3 millimeters beyond the second sleeve 387 r of the second light guide 383 r .
- the first light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 q and the second light conducting optical fiber bundle 386 r may be omitted from the dental curing light 380 g and light may be emitted from the light sources 382 q , 382 r to the tips 388 q , 388 r and directly onto the tooth.
- the light sources 382 q , 382 r near the end of the light guides 383 q , 383 r loss of light intensity and light scattering are minimized.
- the first light guide 383 q and the second light guide 383 r are mounted on a hinge assembly 395 g such that the first light guide 383 q may pivot in direction O 3 shown in FIG. 12G and the second light guide 383 r may pivot in direction O 4 shown in FIG. 12G .
- the hinge assembly 395 g includes a central pivot pin 397 g in the middle of a helical torsion spring that has a first leg 398 g that biases the first light guide 383 g in direction O 5 and a second leg 399 g that biases the second light guide 383 r in direction O 6 as shown in FIG. 12G .
- the dental curing light 380 g can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation.
- the first light guide 383 q and the second light guide 383 r can be flexed outward in directions O 3 and O 4 respectively as described with reference to FIG.
- the first light guide 383 q and the second light guide 383 g are released such that the first tip 388 q of the dental curing light 380 g assumes a position near a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 6 millimeters, most preferably at 3-4 millimeters) and the second tip 388 r of the dental curing light 380 g assumes a position near a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 6 millimeters, most preferably at 3-4 millimeters).
- the dental curing light 380 h includes an electrical power supply 381 h (such as batteries) and light sources 382 s , 382 t , 382 u in electrical communication by way of line 381 x with the electrical power supply 381 h .
- the light sources 382 s , 382 t , 382 u can be high intensity light emitting diodes as is known in the art.
- the dental curing light 380 h can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials.
- the electrical power supply 381 h is contained in a housing 401 h .
- the dental curing light 380 h includes an tubular extension arm 383 h having a distal section 384 h and a distal end 385 h .
- an arch-shaped support 387 h on which light sources 382 s , 382 t , 382 u are mounted.
- the included angle A between the distal section 384 h and the distal end 385 h is about 90 degrees; however, the included angle between the distal section 384 h and the distal end 385 h can be about 30 degrees to about 150 degrees, preferably about 60 degrees to about 120 degrees.
- FIG. 12H and 12I the included angle A between the distal section 384 h and the distal end 385 h can be about 30 degrees to about 150 degrees, preferably about 60 degrees to about 120 degrees.
- the arch-shaped support 387 h has a generally U-shaped perimeter; however, other perimeter shapes, such as square, rectangular, V-shaped, oval, or circular, can be used.
- the support 387 h has a base wall 388 x , a first wall 389 x extending from the base wall 388 x , and a spaced second wall 390 x extending from the base wall 388 x .
- the base wall 388 x is connected to the arm 383 h .
- the arch-shaped support 387 h can be rigid, or can be formed from a flexible material that retains its shape upon deforming.
- An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane.
- the dental curing light 380 h can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth.
- a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation.
- the dental curing light 380 h is positioned such that the light source 382 s assumes a position near a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 9 millimeters), the light source 382 t assumes a position near an occlusal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 9 millimeters), and the light source 382 u assumes a position near a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 9 millimeters).
- FIGS. 16-18 there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomic dental matrix 130 which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously.
- a first strip 132 having a concave side surface 140 and a convex side surface 138 at planes horizontal to the first strip 132 .
- the first strip 132 of the dental matrix 130 also has a base portion 142 and an upper portion 144 integral with and extending upward from the base portion 142 of the first strip 132 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 140 forming the base portion 142 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion 142 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 146 of the first strip 132 (see FIG. 17 ).
- the horizontally concave side surface 140 forming the upper portion 144 of the first strip 132 is vertically concave (see FIG. 17 ).
- the dental matrix 130 there is also a second strip 152 having a concave side surface 158 and a convex side surface 160 at planes horizontal to the second strip 152 .
- the second strip 152 of the dental matrix 130 also has a base portion 162 and an upper portion 164 integral with and extending upward from the base portion 162 of the second strip 152 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 158 forming the base portion 162 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion 162 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 166 of the second strip 152 (see FIG. 17 ).
- the horizontally concave side surface 158 forming the upper portion 164 of the second strip 152 is vertically concave (see FIG. 17 ).
- the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 are joined by fusing at a middle portion 172 of the dental matrix 130 at the upper portion 144 of the first strip 132 and the upper portion 164 of the second strip 152 .
- the dashed oval in FIG. 16 shows an example area of fusion.
- the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 can be formed as separate pieces and fused together or molded as a single piece.
- the dental matrix 130 is formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) material such as a polymeric film.
- a translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- the dental matrix 130 can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum.
- the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 can be formed using the same or different materials.
- the ends of the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 have a material thickness Ta (which may be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment).
- the thickness of the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 tapers to a thickness Tb measured from the concave side surface 140 of the first strip 132 to the concave side surface 158 of the second strip 152 .
- the thickness Tb is less than two times the thickness Ta such that the dental matrix 130 can be more easily positioned between restoration of two approximating teeth.
- the thickness Tb equals the thickness Ta.
- Ta can be about 0.002 inches and Tb can be about 0.002 inches.
- the contact area of the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 that is common to the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 will be the thickness of one sheet of strip (about 0.002 inches). This will mitigate the serious problem of back to back matrices that, when the matrices are removed, an open contact is created of 0.004 inches or more.
- Ta can be about 0.002 inches and Tb can be about 0.001 inches. In other words, the contact area that is common to the first strip 132 and the second strip 152 will be less than the thickness of one strip, or less than 0.002 inches.
- One non-limiting advantage of the thinner section where the two wings of the matrix join (or are shared) is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously.
- the space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs.
- the placement of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 between approximating teeth occurs before the dental matrix 130 is inserted between the approximating teeth.
- the dentist stretches the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 .
- the dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be stretched by inserting the ends of a pliers in the first throughhole 58 and the second throughhole 59 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 and opening the ends of the pliers.
- the dentist can grab and pull apart the end portions 51 and 52 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 .
- the stretching of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 leads to a decrease in vertical cross-section of the middle portion 53 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 such that the dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be inserted between approximating teeth 12 and 24 by movement in direction C of FIG. 4 .
- the dental matrix 130 can then be placed between approximating teeth 12 and 24 and the stretching tensile force on the dental matrix stabilizer 48 is released.
- the dental matrix stabilizer 48 biases the base portion 142 of the dental matrix 130 against the tooth 12 and the dental matrix stabilizer 48 biases the base portion 162 of the dental matrix 130 against the tooth 24 .
- the matrix 130 is positioned in a four handed operation in which the double sided matrix 130 is inserted by one person as the other clinical person stretches the stabilizer 48 to allow the double sided matrix 130 to seat, then the stabilizer 48 is released and relaxes into proper position.
- one or two clear stabilizing wedges can be inserted after the matrix 130 is placed.
- FIGS. 19-21 there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomic dental matrix 230 which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously.
- the dental matrix 230 there is a first strip 232 having a concave side surface 240 and a convex side surface 238 at planes horizontal to the first strip 232 .
- the first strip 232 of the dental matrix 230 also has a base portion 242 and an upper portion 244 integral with and extending upward from the base portion 242 of the first strip 232 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 240 forming the base portion 242 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion 242 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 246 of the first strip 232 (see FIG. 20 ).
- the horizontally concave side surface 240 forming the upper portion 244 of the first strip 232 is vertically concave (see FIG. 20 ).
- the dental matrix 230 there is also a second strip 252 having a concave side surface 258 and a convex side surface 260 at planes horizontal to the second strip 252 .
- the second strip 252 of the dental matrix 230 also has a base portion 262 and an upper portion 264 integral with and extending upward from the base portion 262 of the second strip 252 .
- the horizontally concave side surface 258 forming the base portion 262 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion 262 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 266 of the second strip 252 (see FIG. 20 ).
- the horizontally concave side surface 258 forming the upper portion 264 of the second strip 252 is vertically concave (see FIG. 20 ).
- the first strip 232 and the second strip 252 are joined by fusing at a middle portion 272 of the dental matrix 230 at the upper portion 244 of the first strip 232 and the upper portion 264 of the second strip 252 .
- the first strip 232 and the second strip 252 can be formed as separate pieces and fused together or molded as a single piece.
- the dental matrix 230 also includes an oval throughhole 290 that in one example can be a 2 ⁇ 3 millimeter oval. Other shapes are also possible for the throughhole 290 .
- the dental matrix 230 is formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- One non-limiting example translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- the dental matrix 230 can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum.
- the ends of the first strip 232 and the second strip 252 have a material thickness Ta (which can be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment).
- the thickness of the first strip 232 and the second strip 252 tapers to a thickness Tb measured from the concave side surface 240 of the first strip 232 to the concave side surface 258 of the second strip 252 .
- the thickness Tb is less than two times the thickness Ta such that the dental matrix 230 can be more easily positioned between restoration of two approximating teeth.
- the thickness Tb equals the thickness Ta.
- One non-limiting advantage of the thinner section where the two wings of the matrix join is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously.
- the space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs.
- the placement of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer 48 between approximating teeth occurs before the dental matrix 230 is inserted between the approximating teeth.
- the dentist stretches the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 .
- the dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be stretched by inserting the ends of a pliers in the first throughhole 58 and the second throughhole 59 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 and opening the ends of the pliers.
- the dentist can grab and pull apart the end portions 51 and 52 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown in FIG. 4 .
- the stretching of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 leads to a thinning of the middle portion 53 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 such that the dental matrix stabilizer 48 can be inserted between approximating teeth 12 and 24 by movement in direction C of FIG. 4 .
- the dental matrix 230 can then be placed between approximating teeth 12 and 24 and the stretching force on the dental matrix stabilizer 48 is released.
- the dental matrix stabilizer 48 biases the base portion 242 of the dental matrix 230 against the tooth 12 and the dental matrix stabilizer 48 biases the base portion 262 of the dental matrix 230 against the tooth 24 .
- the throughhole 290 will allow restorative material from both cavity preparations to unite.
- the approximating teeth will separate along the cleavage plane.
- the dental matrix 230 can be cutaway, and the patient can be dismissed and the teeth will thereafter cleave (snap apart) with normal mastication to form a tight contact. This will assure that a strong tight tooth to tooth contact is created.
- Special offset shears can be used to cutaway the matrix 230 that would otherwise be locked onto teeth.
- a perforation can be created on the lingual side that will allow for easy removal of the dental matrix 230 .
- FIG. 22 there is shown still another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomic dental matrix 230 A which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously.
- the dental matrix 230 A there is a first strip 232 A having a concave side surface 240 A and a convex side surface 238 A at planes horizontal to the first strip 232 A.
- the first strip 232 A of the dental matrix 230 A also has a base portion (not shown, similar to 242 in FIG. 20 ) and an upper portion 244 A integral with and extending upward from the base portion of the first strip 232 A.
- the horizontally concave side surface 240 A forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of the first strip 232 A.
- the horizontally concave side surface 240 A forming the upper portion 244 A of the first strip 232 A is vertically concave.
- the dental matrix 230 A there is also a second strip 252 A having a concave side surface 258 A and a convex side surface 260 A at planes horizontal to the second strip 252 A.
- the second strip 252 A of the dental matrix 230 A also has a base portion (not shown, similar to 262 in FIG. 20 ) and an upper portion 264 A integral with and extending upward from the base portion of the second strip 252 A.
- the horizontally concave side surface 258 A forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of the second strip 252 A.
- the horizontally concave side surface 258 A forming the upper portion 264 A of the second strip 252 A is vertically concave.
- the first strip 232 A and the second strip 252 A are joined by fusing at a middle portion 272 A of the dental matrix 230 A at the upper portion 244 A of the first strip 232 A and the upper portion 264 A of the second strip 252 A.
- the first strip 232 A includes an oval throughhole 289 A that in one example can be a 2 ⁇ 3 millimeter oval.
- the second strip 252 A includes an oval throughhole 290 A that in one example can be a 2 ⁇ 3 millimeter oval.
- the oval throughhole 289 A and the oval throughhole 290 A are aligned when the first strip 232 A and the second strip 252 A are joined by fusing. Other shapes are also possible for the throughholes 289 A and 290 A.
- a thin membrane 288 A is positioned between the throughholes 289 A and 290 A and a portion of the first strip 232 A and the second strip 252 A.
- the first strip 232 A, the second strip 252 A, and the membrane 288 A are formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- a translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- the dental matrix 230 A can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum.
- the ends of the first strip 232 A and the second strip 252 A have a material thickness Ta (which can be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment).
- the thickness of the first strip 232 A and the second strip 252 A tapers to a thickness Tb measured from the concave side surface 240 A of the first strip 232 A to the concave side surface 258 A of the second strip 252 A.
- the thickness Tb is less than two times the thickness Ta such that the dental matrix 230 A can be more easily positioned between restoration of two approximating teeth.
- the thickness Tb equals the thickness Ta.
- One non-limiting advantage of the thinner section where the two wings of the matrix join is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously.
- the space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs.
- FIGS. 23-24 there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomic dental matrix 230 B which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously.
- the dental matrix 230 B there is a first strip 232 B having a concave side surface 240 B and a convex side surface 238 B at planes horizontal to the first strip 232 B.
- the first strip 232 B of the dental matrix 230 B also has a base portion (not shown, similar to 262 B) and an upper portion 244 B integral with and extending upward from the base portion of the first strip 232 B.
- the horizontally concave side surface 240 B forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of the first strip 232 B.
- the horizontally concave side surface 240 B forming the upper portion 244 B of the first strip 232 B is vertically concave.
- the dental matrix 230 B there is also a second strip 252 B having a concave side surface 258 B and a convex side surface 260 B at planes horizontal to the second strip 252 B.
- the second strip 252 B of the dental matrix 230 B also has a base portion 262 B and an upper portion 264 B integral with and extending upward from the base portion of the second strip 252 B.
- the horizontally concave side surface 258 B forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of the second strip 252 B.
- the horizontally concave side surface 258 B forming the upper portion 264 B of the second strip 252 B is vertically concave.
- the first strip 232 B and the second strip 252 B are formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- a translucent material such as a polymeric film.
- translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as MylarTM.
- the dental matrix 230 B can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum.
- the second strip 252 B includes an oval throughhole 290 B that in one example can be about 2 ⁇ 3 millimeter oval. Other shapes are also possible for the throughhole 290 B.
- a section of the first strip 232 B is positioned in the throughhole 290 B of the second strip 252 B.
- the ends of the first strip 232 B and the second strip 252 B have a material thickness Ta (which can be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment).
- the thickness of the dental matrix 230 B within the perimeter of the throughhole 290 B will be the thickness of the first strip 232 B, i.e., a single material thickness.
- One non-limiting advantage of the single material thickness within the perimeter of the throughhole 290 B is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously. The space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs.
- a single material thickness within the perimeter of the throughhole 290 B is present.
- the separator ring 410 has an arcuate body 412 having legs 414 and 416 that extend at a generally right angle from the body 412 .
- Leg 414 has a disc-shaped end 415
- leg 416 has a disc-shaped end 417 .
- the body is preferably formed from stainless steel. However other elastic metallic and polymeric materials are suitable.
- the separator ring 410 has a clamp 420 mounted on the end of the leg 414 , and a clamp 422 mounted on the end of the leg 416 .
- the clamp 420 has an inwardly directed outer surface 424 that slopes upward and outward from side walls 426 , 428 of the clamp 420 and reaches a ridge 432 .
- the clamp 422 has an inwardly directed outer surface 434 that slopes upward and outward from side walls 436 , 438 of the clamp 420 and reaches a ridge 439 .
- the bottom of the clamp 422 has an upwardly directed concavity 444 .
- the bottom of the clamp 420 has a similar upwardly directed concavity (not shown).
- the upwardly directed concavity 444 allows the placement of a stabilizer with ends that do not separate (such as stabilizers 48 d , 48 g ) under the upwardly directed concavity 444 .
- the separator ring 410 also has an arcuate cover 456 .
- the clamps 420 , 422 and the cover 456 are preferably formed from a translucent elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer.
- the clamp 422 of the separator ring 410 can be placed between the separate end members 63 , 64 of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 with the ridge 439 directed inward toward the stabilizer 48 when the separator ring 410 is placed on the dental matrix stabilizer 48 .
- the clamp 420 of the separator ring 410 can also be placed between the opposite side end members of the dental matrix stabilizer 48 in a similar fashion.
- the translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material of the clamps 420 , 422 allows the passage of light to cure restorative material in the tooth 12 .
- FIGS. 29-31 there is shown a top view of three adjacent teeth having three different cavity preparations.
- tooth 510 of FIGS. 29 and 30 there is shown a conventional proximal box-shaped “slot” cavity preparation 515 .
- tooth 520 of FIG. 29 there is shown a conventional mesio-occlusal cavity preparation 522 having a first box shaped mesial section 523 , a second intermediate section 524 , and an inner extension 525 .
- the distance from the occlusal to the floor of the mesial section 523 is greater than the distance from the occlusal to the floor of the intermediate section 524 which is greater than the distance from the occlusal to the floor of the inner extension 525 .
- the inner extension 525 may be described as having a dovetail shape.
- a cavity preparation 532 according to the invention is shown in tooth 530 having an interproximal surface 531 .
- a surface 534 which will form the interface between the restorative material and the tooth has a serpentine outline 535 a from the cavity margin 536 to an intermediate point 538 of the cavity preparation 532 .
- the surface 534 has a serpentine outline 535 b from the cavity margin 541 to the intermediate point 538 of the cavity preparation 532 .
- the surface 534 slopes in a curvilinear manner from occlusal to gingival.
- the hollow cavity preparation 532 can be saucer shaped from buccal view and occlusal view. No mechanical retention is necessarily present in the cavity form as all retention is based on enamel adhesion, augmented with dentin adhesion. All margins are therefore knife edge and disappearing in nature versus the abrupt margins of current cavity designs. In another variation all of the margins, occlusal, gingival, buccal and lingual may have serpentine outlines. These margins provide additional adhesion and an even more pronounced knife edge, more invisible and better sealed filling margins.
- the invention provides improved methods, dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth
- the filling material can be a single load of filling material that is cured in a single curing step in contrast to previous methods in which multiple two millimeter sections of filling material must be separately loaded and cured in multiple loading/curing steps.
- the method of the invention avoids the seams that are present between multiple two millimeter sections of filling material in prior methods.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery (AREA)
- Dentistry (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
- Dental Prosthetics (AREA)
- Dental Tools And Instruments Or Auxiliary Dental Instruments (AREA)
- Injection Moulding Of Plastics Or The Like (AREA)
Abstract
There are disclosed methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth, and dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits that can be used in the methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth.
Description
- This application is a divisional application of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/834,959 filed Aug. 7, 2007, which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/844,333 filed Sep. 13, 2006 and from U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 60/887,291 filed Jan. 30, 2007.
- Not Applicable.
- 1. Field of the Invention
- The present invention relates methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth and for dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits that may be used in the methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth.
- 2. Description of the Related Art
- Dental cavities that have spread to the dentin or have undergone cavitation are typically treated by removing the decayed portion of the tooth and thereafter filling the missing tooth structure with a restorative material such as silver (amalgam), white (resin), porcelain, or gold. Cavities that are located adjacent to neighboring teeth are called interproximal cavities.
- When treating interproximal cavities, the dentist first removes the decayed portion of the side of the tooth. In order to properly deposit the restorative material on the side of the tooth without undesired leaking of the restorative material beyond the side of the tooth, the dentist places a dental matrix around at least a portion of the tooth. The dental matrix may be a metallic or plastic strip, and when the matrix is placed around at least a portion of the tooth, the matrix acts as a form for the desired shape of the restored tooth. Various dental matrix bands are shown in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,712,608, 6,619,956, 6,350,122, 6,142,778, 6,079,978, 5,975,906, 5,807,101, 5,730,592, 5,622,496, 5,501,595, 5,460,525, 5,425,635, 5,114,341, 4,997,367, 4,781,583, 4,718,849, 4,704,087, 4,601,662, 4,553,937, 4,536,155, 4,523,909, 4,024,643, 3,842,505, 3,108,377, and 2,611,182, and U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2006/0019217 and 2005/0089814. (These patents and all other patents and publications cited herein are incorporated herein by reference.) The disadvantages of these known matrix bands is that they are not truly anatomic and therefore, they must be conformed to the tooth by pressure or other means. As a result, these matrixes are inefficient in that more dentist time is needed to complete the restoration, and the final result may be a non-anatomic restoration.
- One or more dental wedges may be used to spread adjacent teeth to allow the dental matrix to be positioned between the adjacent teeth. The dental wedge(s) may also function as a matrix stabilizer that maintains the matrix in a desired position with respect to the tooth to be restored. Various dental wedges are shown in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,890,176, 6,761,562, 6,482,007, 6,435,874, 6,425,760, 6,234,792, 5,527,181, 5,104,317, 4,468,199, 4,337,041, 4,259,070 and D439,667.
- A dental separator ring may also be used when filling interproximal cavities. The separator ring applies pressure against the adjacent teeth to force the adjacent teeth apart to allow a dental matrix to be positioned between the adjacent teeth. The dental separator ring may also include specially configured ends that also function as a matrix stabilizer that maintains the matrix in a desired position with respect to the tooth to be restored. Example dental separator rings can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,325,625, 6,206,697 and 5,607,302.
- A dentist may choose to use curable restorative material to fill the interproximal cavity. Many curable dental restorative materials harden by polymerization reactions initiated by ultraviolet light or blue wavelengths. After placing curable restorative material between the matrix and the tooth being restored and in contact with the tooth being restored, the dentist uses a dental curing light device to direct light onto the curable restorative material to initiate polymerization of the curable restorative material. The curable restorative material then hardens in the cavity. Example dental lights and light curing devices can be found in U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,097,364, 6,976,841, 6,155,823, 6,162,055, and 5,017,140 and U.S. Patent Application Publication Nos. 2006/0275733, 2006/0275732, 2006/018835, 2006/0155171, 2006/0154197, 2006/0110700, 2006/0088798, 2004/0229186 and 2004/0053189.
- Even though various dental matrices, dental wedges and dental curing light devices are available, there is a still a need for improved methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth and for improved dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits that may be used in methods for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth.
- The invention meets the foregoing needs by providing improved methods, dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth.
- The invention provides a method for the restoration of a tooth having an original shape including a top surface and an interproximal surface. In the method, a portion of the top surface of the tooth and a portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth are removed using conventional dental instruments to form a hollow cavity preparation that extends from the top surface to the interproximal surface of the tooth. The hollow cavity preparation is preferably saucer shaped wherein the cavity preparation does not extend inward more than two millimeters from the interproximal surface of the tooth. The removed portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth is then surrounded with a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomic dental matrix. The actual anatomic shapes of the matrix are created from scans of natural teeth, molds of natural teeth, and/or molds of tooth models. Thus, by “anatomic”, it is meant that the matrix has an inner surface that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored.
- A lightly filled or unfilled light curable resin tooth bonding agent is then applied to the tooth covering the entire cavity preparation. The resin tooth bonding agent is then air thinned except on the tooth surface where a small pool of resin tooth bonding agent is maintained. The resin tooth bonding agent is not light cured at this point. A light-curable flowable composite is injected into the cavity preparation to create a pool of the flowable composite and the tooth bonding agent in the cavity preparation. A light-curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of the flowable composite and the tooth bonding agent before light curing the pool of the flowable composite. The flowable composite and the paste composite resin and the tooth bonding agent contained in the cavity preparation are then light cured simultaneously. The result is an injection molded restoration. Optionally, a curable base material can be loaded into deeper cavity preparations to cover the dentin. The curable base material is cured before beginning the injection molding process. Preferably, the cured base material is about two millimeters from the projected outer tooth surface of the restoration.
- In one version of the method, a pre-wedging step occurs in that a wedge is inserted between the interproximal surfaces of the teeth before beginning the cavity preparation. This creates a gap between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and the interproximal surface of a second tooth, and also protects and compresses the soft tissue and rubber dam. The wedge is removed, and thereafter the removed portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth is surrounded with the matrix. A translucent elastic matrix stabilizer can also be positioned in contact with the matrix to maintain contact of the matrix with the tooth being restored. A separator ring can also be positioned in contact with the matrix stabilizer to create separation between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and an interproximal surface of a second tooth adjacent the tooth being restored.
- During the curing process, light is directed at the top surface of the tooth, the buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and the lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth. Preferably, curing light is simultaneously directed at the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth.
- Thus, in the method of the invention, a single load of restorative material can be cured in a single step to produce a seamless cavity restoration.
- In one aspect, the invention provides a method for the restoration of a tooth having an original shape including a top surface and an interproximal surface. In the method, a portion of the top surface of the tooth and a portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth are removed to form a hollow cavity preparation which extends from the top surface to the interproximal surface of the tooth. The removed portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth is surrounded with a matrix. A light-curable resin tooth bonding agent is placed into the cavity preparation. A light-curable flowable composite is then injected into the cavity preparation to create a pool of the flowable composite in the cavity preparation. A light-curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of the flowable composite before light curing the pool of the flowable composite. The bonding agent and the flowable composite and the paste composite resin contained in the cavity preparation are then simultaneously light cured.
- The dental practitioner may utilize an acid etching step with liquid and/or gel phosphoric acid treatment before placing the bonding agent into the cavity preparation. Preferably, the bonding agent is self-etching. The method can include a pre-wedging step including inserting a wedge pre-operatively between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and an interproximal surface of a second tooth adjacent the tooth being restored to separate the tooth being restored and the second tooth and to protect non-diseased surfaces between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and the interproximal surface of the second tooth. The cavity preparation can then be formed, and the wedge removed.
- The dental practitioner may position a translucent elastic matrix stabilizer in contact with the matrix to maintain contact of the matrix with the tooth being restored and/or to create separation of the teeth. The dental practitioner may also position a separator ring with a transparent and anatomic interproximal zone in contact with the matrix stabilizer and matrix to create separation between the interproximal surface of the tooth being restored and an interproximal surface of a second tooth adjacent the tooth being restored.
- In the light curing step, the dental practitioner may simultaneously direct light at the top surface of the tooth, at a buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and at a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth. Alternatively, the dental practitioner may direct light at the top surface of the tooth, and then thereafter simultaneously direct light at a buccal portion and a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth. In one exemplary version of the method, light is directed from a first light guide at a buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and directed from a second light guide at a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, wherein the first light guide and the second light guide are hinged at a dental curing light housing.
- The hollow cavity preparation is preferably saucer shaped. Preferably, the cavity preparation does not extend inward more than two millimeters from the interproximal surface of the tooth. Preferably, the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in an occlusal view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation. Preferably, the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in a gingival view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation. Preferably, the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in a buccal view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation. Preferably, the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped and in a lingual view has a first serpentine outline from a first cavity margin to an intermediate point of the cavity preparation and has a second serpentine outline from a second cavity margin to the intermediate point of the cavity preparation. Preferably, the hollow cavity preparation is saucer shaped in an occlusal view, and/or buccal view, and/or lingual view, and/or gingival view.
- Various forms of the matrix are suitable for the method. For example, the matrix can be translucent, sectional, and/or anatomically shaped. The matrix can be tooth specific, or the matrix can be tooth type specific, or the matrix can be tooth surface specific.
- In one exemplary version of the method, further flowable composite and/or paste composite resin are not added after the first load of flowable composite and paste composite resin such that the method produces a single cured layer load and layer of flowable composite and paste composite resin. Advantageously, the filled cavity preparation is seamless, injection molded, and/or not layered. In another version of the method, a curable base/liner material is loaded into the cavity preparation, the base/liner material is cured, and thereafter the light-curable flowable composite is injected into the cavity preparation to create the pool of the flowable composite in the cavity preparation. Preferably, an external surface of the cured base/liner material is two millimeters or less from a projected external interproximal filling surface of the tooth.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a first embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer. The interproximal dental matrix stabilizer includes an elongated elastic body having a first end portion, a second opposite end portion, a middle portion connecting the first end portion and the second end portion, a first side surface, a second side surface, a top surface and a bottom surface. The first end portion has a first throughhole extending from the top surface to the bottom surface, and the second end portion has a second throughhole extending from the top surface to the bottom surface. The first end portion includes an area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a first end surface of the body whereby the first end portion can be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area of material weakness, which can extend from the first throughhole to the first end surface of the body. Preferably, the body comprises a translucent material. Most preferably, the body comprises a translucent material. Also, the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer can be made with translucent elastomeric material with a round and/or tapered cross section. The interproximal dental matrix stabilizer can be used in place of traditional wooden, plastic or rubber wedges and also allows for better photon transfer from a curing light. Preferably, the second end portion includes a second area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a second end surface of the body whereby the second end portion can be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the second area of material weakness.
- In one exemplary form, the top surface of the body includes a first pair of upper side-by-side depressions in the middle portion of the body, and the bottom surface of the body includes at least one concavity in the middle portion of the body. In another exemplary form, the first pair of upper side-by-side depressions include an inwardly curved inner surface, and the bottom surface of the body includes a concavity having an inwardly curved inner surface. In yet another exemplary form, the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body. In still another exemplary form, the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near the first throughhole, and the second side surface of the body includes a second curved protrusion located near the second throughhole.
- In yet another exemplary form, the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near the first throughhole, and the second side surface of the body includes a second curved protrusion located near the first throughhole. In still another exemplary form, the separate end members have a rectangular vertical cross-section.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a second embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer. The interproximal dental matrix stabilizer includes an elongated elastic body having a first end portion, a second opposite end portion, a middle portion connecting the first end portion and the second end portion, a first side surface, a second side surface, a top surface and a bottom surface. The first side surface of the body includes a first outwardly extending protrusion on the first end portion wherein the first outwardly extending protrusion is spaced inward from a first end surface of the body. The first side surface of the body further includes a second outwardly extending protrusion on the second end portion wherein the second outwardly extending protrusion is spaced inward from a second end surface of the body. Preferably, the body comprises a translucent material.
- In one exemplary form, the first end portion includes a first section adjacent the first outwardly extending protrusion and a second section connected to the first section of the first end portion opposite the first outwardly extending protrusion wherein the second section of the first end portion extends laterally outward from the first section of the first end portion, and the second end portion includes a first section adjacent the second outwardly extending protrusion and a second section connected to the first section of the second end portion opposite the second outwardly extending protrusion wherein the second section of the second end portion extends laterally outward from the first section of the second end portion. Preferably, the second section of the first end portion is generally disc shaped, and the second section of the second end portion is generally disc shaped. Preferably, the top surface includes indicia for facilitating placement of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer between approximating teeth with the top surface positioned away from the gingiva.
- In another exemplary form, the second side surface of the body includes a third outwardly extending protrusion on the first end portion, and the second side surface of the body further includes a fourth outwardly extending protrusion on the second end portion. In yet another exemplary form, the first end portion includes an area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a first end surface of the body whereby the first end portion can be separated into separate first end members by application of a separation force at the area of material weakness, and the second end portion includes a second area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a second end surface of the body whereby the second end portion can be separated into separate second end members by application of a separation force at the second area of material weakness. Preferably, the first separate end members and the second separate end members have a rectangular vertical cross-section. In still another exemplary form, the first side surface of the body includes a first curved protrusion located near an intermediate vertical plane of the body. In yet another exemplary form, the bottom surface of the body includes a concavity. The concavity can have a longitudinal axis and a lateral axis transverse to the longitudinal axis wherein the longitudinal axis extends toward the first end portion and the second end portion and the longitudinal axis is longer than the lateral axis.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix for providing a form for filling a hollow cavity preparation in a tooth. The matrix includes a curved strip of material. The strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the cavity preparation and a surface of the tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the cavity preparation and the surface of the tooth to create the form for filling the cavity preparation, which may be interproximal. The strip has a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface, and the strip has a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion. The concave side surface is anatomic in that the concave side surface has an inner surface that that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored. Also, the concave side surface and the convex side surface can extend from the first end to the second end. A first thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a first plane horizontal to the strip is less than a second thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a second plane horizontal to the strip wherein the second plane is below the first plane.
- In one exemplary form, the horizontally concave side surface forming the base portion is not vertically concave, and the horizontally concave side surface forming the upper portion is vertically concave. In another exemplary form, the strip thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at planes horizontal to the strip decreases from lower to upper sections of the upper portion of the strip. In yet another exemplary form, the concave side surface and the convex side surface extend from the first end to the second end.
- Preferably, the material of the curved strip is translucent. In one form, the material is metallic. In another form, the material is polymeric. One non-limiting advantage to the translucent sectional matrix is that it allows a single load of composite material, which alleviates both the problems of (i) voids between the two millimeter separately loaded and cured increments required with composite material and a metal matrix and (ii) the additional time wasted to place and light cure several layers of composite filling material.
- In one exemplary form, the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped. In another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth specific. In yet another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth type specific. In still another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix for providing a form for filling a hollow cavity preparation in a tooth. The dental matrix includes a curved strip of material. The strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the cavity preparation and a surface of the tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the cavity preparation and the surface of the tooth to create the form for filling the cavity preparation, which may be interproximal. The strip has a first side surface and a second side surface. The first side surface has an intermediate horizontally convex section between a first horizontally concave section and a second horizontally concave section. Preferably, the strip has a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion, and the base portion includes the horizontally convex section, the first horizontally concave section and the second horizontally concave section.
- In one exemplary form, the strip thickness between the first side surface and the second side surface at planes horizontal to the strip decreases from lower to upper sections of the upper portion of the strip. In another exemplary form, the first side surface forming the base portion is not vertically concave, and the second side surface forming the upper portion is vertically concave. In yet another exemplary form, a first thickness between the first side surface and the second side surface at a first plane horizontal to the strip is less than a second thickness between the first side surface and the second side surface at a second plane horizontal to the strip, the second plane being below the first plane.
- Preferably, the material of the curved strip is translucent. In one form, the material is metallic. In another form, the material is polymeric.
- In one exemplary form, the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped. In another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth specific. In yet another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth type specific. In still another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a dental matrix for providing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth. The matrix includes a first curved strip of a first material. The first strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the first tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the first tooth to create the form for filling the first interproximal cavity preparation. The first strip has a first side surface and a second side surface. The matrix also includes a second curved strip of a second material. The second strip has a first side surface and a second side surface. The second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the second tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the second tooth to create the form for filling the second interproximal cavity preparation. The first curved strip and the second curved strip are joined at a middle portion of the multi-strip matrix, and the middle portion of the matrix has a thickness less than two times a thickness of the first end of the first curved strip. Preferably, the first curved strip and the second curved strip have an arc of less than 270 degrees.
- In one exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are translucent. The first material and the second material can be metallic, or the first material and the second material can be polymeric.
- In one exemplary form, the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped. In another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth specific. In yet another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth type specific. In still another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- In one exemplary form, the first curved strip has a first horizontally concave side surface and a first horizontally convex side surface, and the second curved strip has a second horizontally concave side surface and a second horizontally convex side surface. The concave side surfaces of the first and second strip are anatomic in that the concave side surfaces have an inner surface that that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored. Also, the concave side surface and the convex side surface can extend from the first end to the second end of the first strip and the second strip. In another exemplary form, the first strip has a first base portion and a first upper portion integral with and extending upward from the first base portion, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first base portion is not vertically concave, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first upper portion is vertically concave, the second strip has a second base portion and a second upper portion integral with and extending upward from the second base portion, the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second base portion is not vertically concave, and the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second upper portion is vertically concave.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix. In the method, a matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the multi-strip matrix is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip. The cavity preparations may then be filled.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix. A matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth. The matrix stabilizer is placed in tension to create a middle portion of decreased cross-section in the matrix stabilizer. The multi-strip matrix is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip. The tension is then released on the matrix stabilizer such that the matrix stabilizer is placed in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip. The cavity preparations may then be filled.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix. The multi-strip is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the first tooth and the second curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the second tooth. At least one dental wedge is then placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip thereby biasing the first curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and biasing the second curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth. The cavity preparations may then be filled.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a dental matrix for providing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth. The matrix includes a first curved strip of a first material. The first strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the first tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the first tooth to create the form for filling the first interproximal cavity preparation. The first strip has a first side surface and a second side surface, and the first curved strip has a first throughhole. The matrix also includes a second curved strip of a second material. The second strip has a first side surface and a second side surface. The second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the second tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the second tooth to create the form for filling the second interproximal cavity preparation. The second curved strip has a second throughhole. In the matrix, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are joined at a middle portion of the matrix. Preferably, the first curved strip and the second curved strip have an arc of less than 270 degrees. Preferably, the middle portion of the matrix has a thickness less than two times a thickness of the first end of the first curved strip.
- In one exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are translucent. The first material and the second material can be metallic, or the first material and the second material can be polymeric.
- In one exemplary form, the matrix is sectional and anatomically shaped. In another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth specific. In yet another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth type specific. In still another exemplary form, the matrix is tooth surface specific.
- In another exemplary form, the first curved strip has a first horizontally concave side surface and a first horizontally convex side surface, and the second curved strip has a second horizontally concave side surface and a second horizontally convex side surface. In yet another exemplary form, the first strip has a first base portion and a first upper portion integral with and extending upward from the first base portion, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first base portion is not vertically concave, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first upper portion is vertically concave, the second strip has a second base portion and a second upper portion integral with and extending upward from the second base portion, the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second base portion is not vertically concave, and the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second upper portion is vertically concave. In still another exemplary form, the first throughhole and the second throughhole are aligned to create a passageway. In yet another exemplary form, the first throughhole and the second throughhole are aligned, and a membrane is positioned between the first throughhole and the second throughhole.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix. A matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth. The multi-strip matrix is placed between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip. The cavity preparations may then be filled.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth. A matrix stabilizer is placed between an interproximal surface of the first tooth and an interproximal surface of the second tooth. The matrix stabilizer is placed in tension to create a middle portion of decreased cross-section in the matrix stabilizer. The multi-strip matrix is inserted between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, the second curved strip is placed in contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth, and the matrix stabilizer is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip. The tension on the matrix stabilizer is released such that the matrix stabilizer is placed in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip. The cavity preparations may then be filled.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides a method for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in an adjacent second tooth using this multi-strip matrix. The multi-strip matrix is inserted between the first tooth and the second tooth such that the first curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and the second curved strip is placed adjacent the interproximal surface of the second tooth. At least one dental wedge is placed between the first curved strip and the second curved strip and in contact with the first curved strip and the second curved strip thereby biasing the first curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the first tooth, and biasing the second curved strip into contact with the interproximal surface of the second tooth. The cavity preparations may then be filled.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a dental matrix kit for providing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth. The matrix kit includes a first curved strip of a first material. The first strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the first tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the first interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the first tooth to create the form for filling the first interproximal cavity preparation. The first strip has a first side surface and a second side surface. The matrix kit includes a second curved strip of a second material. The second strip has a first side surface and a second side surface. The second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and an interproximal surface of the second tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second interproximal cavity preparation and the interproximal surface of the second tooth to create the form for filling the second interproximal cavity preparation. The second curved strip has a throughhole. Preferably, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are sectional and have an arc of less than 270 degrees.
- In one exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are translucent. The first material and the second material can be metallic, or the first material and the second material can be polymeric.
- In one exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are anatomically shaped. In another exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are tooth specific. In yet another exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are tooth type specific. In still another exemplary form, the first curved strip and the second curved strip are tooth surface specific.
- In one exemplary form, the first curved strip has a first horizontally concave side surface and a first horizontally convex side surface, and the second curved strip has a second horizontally concave side surface and a second horizontally convex side surface. In another exemplary form, the first strip has a first base portion and a first upper portion integral with and extending upward from the first base portion, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first base portion is not vertically concave, the first horizontally concave side surface forming the first upper portion is vertically concave, the second strip has a second base portion and a second upper portion integral with and extending upward from the second base portion, the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second base portion is not vertically concave, and the second horizontally concave side surface forming the second upper portion is vertically concave.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a method for preparing a form for filling a first hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a first tooth and a second hollow interproximal cavity preparation in a second tooth. In the method, a first horizontally convex side surface of the first curved strip of the dental matrix kit is placed against a second horizontally convex side surface of the second curved strip of the dental matrix kit. A portion of the first curved strip of the dental matrix kit may also be positioned in the throughhole of the second curved strip of the dental matrix kit.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a dental curing light. The curing light includes an electrical power supply, a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. The first light guide and the second light guide are connected to a housing, and at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide is hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing. Preferably, the first light guide and the second light guide are both hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing.
- In one exemplary form, the first light guide has a first distal tip, the second light guide has a second distal tip, and the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other. In another exemplary form, the first light guide and the second light guide are normally biased into a relaxed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a first distance apart, and the first light guide and the second light guide have an outwardly flexed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a second distance apart, the second distance being greater than the first distance. Preferably, the first distance is about 4 to about 15 millimeters.
- In one exemplary form, the first light guide is in optical communication with a first light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, the second light guide is in optical communication with a second light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, the first light source is located in the first distal end of the first light guide, and the second light source is located in the second distal end of the second light guide. In another exemplary form, the dental curing light includes a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. The third light guide may be hinged at a dental curing light housing.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth. In the method, a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation. Light is directed from the first light guide of the dental curing light at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation, light is simultaneously directed from the second light guide of the dental curing light at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a dental curing light including an electrical power supply, a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, the first tip including a first tip section having a diameter less than a diameter of the first distal end of the first light guide, a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply and a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide, the second tip including a second tip section having a diameter less than a diameter of the second distal end of the second light guide. Preferably, the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other.
- In one exemplary form, the first light guide is in optical communication with a first light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and the second light guide is in optical communication with a second light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. The first light source can be located in the first distal end of the first light guide, and the second light source can be located in the second distal end of the second light guide.
- In another exemplary form, the first light guide and the second light guide are connected to a housing, and at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide is hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing. In yet another exemplary form, the first tip includes a first light transmitting section extending laterally from a base of the first tip section, and the second tip includes a second light transmitting section extending laterally from a base of the second tip section. In still another exemplary form, at least one of the first distal end of the first light guide and the second distal end of the second light guide includes an opening in fluid communication with a source of flowing air. In yet another exemplary form, the dental curing light includes a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. Preferably, the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first light guide.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a dental curing light and related methods for using the dental curing light. The dental curing includes an electrical power supply, and a light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. The curing light also includes a light guide including a proximal section, a first distal section extending from the proximal section, and a second distal section extending from the proximal section. The proximal section is in optical communication with the light source, the first distal section and the second distal section. The first distal section has a first distal end, and the second distal section has a second distal end.
- The curing light also includes a first light tip having a first base connected to the first distal end of the first distal section of the light guide. The first light tip includes a first hollow tubular opaque body having a first aperture for emitting light. The first body comprises a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the first hollow body can be bent to emit light in a first selected direction from the first aperture. The curing light also includes a second light tip having a second base connected to the second distal end of the second distal section of the light guide. The second light tip includes a second hollow tubular opaque body having a second aperture for emitting light. The second body comprises a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the second hollow body can be bent to emit light in a second selected direction from the second aperture.
- Preferably, an outside diameter of the first light tip tapers inward from the first base toward the first aperture, and an outside diameter of the second light tip tapers inward from the second base toward the second aperture. The tapered curing light tip adaptors (micro-flex tips) are sized to fit into the narrow area between tooth surfaces and to flex to create better access and patient comfort. Tip to composite surface distance is extremely important to the depth and rate of cure where even a six millimeter distance is extremely important. Current curing light tip sizes are far too large and/or stiff to reach interproximally. In one form, the electrical power supply, the light source and the proximal section of the light guide are encased in a housing. In another form, the electrical power supply and the light source are encased in a housing. The first light tip can by removably connected to the first distal end of the first distal section of the light guide, and the second light tip can be removably connected to the second distal end of the second distal section of the light guide. The tapered curing light tip adaptors (micro-flex tips) are sized to fit into the narrow area between tooth surfaces and to flex to create better access and patient comfort. Tip to composite surface distance is extremely important to the depth and rate of cure where even a six millimeter distance is extremely important. Current curing light tip sizes are far too large and/or stiff to reach interproximally.
- The dental curing light can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth. In the method, a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation, light is directed from the first light tip of the dental curing light at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation, and light is directed simultaneously from the second light tip of the dental curing light at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation. In the method, the first light tip can be bent such that light can be directed at the buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation
- In still another aspect, the invention provides a dental curing light and related methods for using the dental curing light. The dental curing light includes an electrical power supply, a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. Preferably, the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first light guide, and the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the second light guide. The dental curing light may include a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, and a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide wherein the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other.
- In one exemplary form, the first light guide is in optical communication with a first light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and the second light guide is in optical communication with a second light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply, and the third light guide is in optical communication with a third light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. Preferably, the first light source is located in a first distal end of the first light guide, and the second light source is located in a second distal end of the second light guide, and the third light source is located in a third distal end of the third light guide. The first light guide and the second light guide can be connected to a housing, and at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide can be movable with respect to the housing. Preferably, the first light guide and the second light guide are both hinged to the housing for movement with respect to the housing. In another exemplary form, a first light transmitting tip is connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide, the first light guide and the second light guide are normally biased into a relaxed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a first distance apart, and the first light guide and the second light guide have an outwardly flexed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a second distance apart, the second distance being greater than the first distance. Preferably, the first distance is about 4 to about 15 millimeters.
- In another aspect, the invention provides a dental curing light including a housing, an electrical power supply, and an elongated arm extending from the housing. The arm has a distal section that terminates in a distal end wherein the distal section and the distal end define an included angle of greater than 0 degrees and less than 180 degrees. The curing light also includes a support having a base wall, a first wall extending from a first end of the base wall, and a spaced apart second wall extending from a second end of the base wall. The base wall is connected to the distal end of the arm. The curing light also includes a first light source in electrical communication with the power supply. The first light source transmits light away from an inner surface of the base wall. The curing light also includes a second light source in electrical communication with the power supply wherein the second light source transmits light away from an inner surface of the first wall. The curing light also includes a third light source in electrical communication with the power supply wherein the third light source transmits light away from an inner surface of the second wall. The included angle can be about 30 degrees to about 150 degrees. Preferably, the included angle is 60 degrees to about 120 degrees. In one form, the included angle is about 90 degrees. The support can have a generally U-shaped perimeter or a generally V-shaped perimeter.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a separator ring for separating teeth and/or for creating adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix. The separator ring includes an elastic metallic body that terminates in a pair of spaced apart clamping ends. The ends are dimensioned to separate teeth and/or create adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix. The ends are translucent.
- In one exemplary form, the ends include a first tip and a spaced apart second tip wherein the first tip is dimensioned to create adaptation pressure on the dental matrix and the second tip is dimensioned to create adaptation pressure on the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer. In another exemplary form, the ends have a configuration selected from the group consisting of J-shaped, L-shaped and V-shaped. In still another exemplary form, the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, and the ends are removable from the elastic body. In yet another exemplary form, the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, each end includes a surface with a ridge, and the ridges are arranged in a facing relationship when the ends are attached to the legs. Preferably, the ridges are centrally located on the surface. Preferably, the ridges extend from one edge to an opposite edge of the surface. The ridges can be coplanar with the legs when the ends are attached to the legs. In another exemplary form, the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, and each end includes a concavity in a surface opposite the body. In still another exemplary form, the body includes a pair of spaced apart legs that extend away laterally from the body, each end is attached to one of the legs, and the body is circular. The body can include an arcuate cover.
- In still another aspect, the invention provides a separator ring for separating teeth and/or for creating adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix. The separator ring includes an elastic metallic body that terminates in a first leg that extends away from the body and a second leg that extends away from the body wherein the first leg and the second leg are in spaced relationship. A first translucent clamping end is attached to the first leg; and a second translucent clamping end is attached to the second leg. The first end and the second end are dimensioned to separate teeth and/or create adaptation pressure on an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer and/or a dental matrix when the separator ring is installed between the teeth.
- In one exemplary form, the first end is removable from the first leg, and the second end is removable from the second leg. In another exemplary form, the first leg extends away perpendicularly from the body, and the second leg extends away perpendicularly from the body. In still another exemplary form, the first end includes a first surface with a first ridge, the second end includes a second surface with a second ridge, and the first ridge and the second ridge are arranged in a facing relationship when the first end is attached to the first leg and the second end is attached to the second leg. The first ridge can be centrally located on the first surface, and the second ridge cam be centrally located on the second surface. Preferably, the first ridge extends from one edge to an opposite edge of the first surface, and the second ridge extends from one edge to an opposite edge of the second surface. The first ridge can be coplanar with the first leg when the first end is attached to the first leg, and the second ridge can be coplanar with the second leg when the second end is attached to the second leg. The first end can include a concavity in a surface opposite the body, and the second end can include a concavity in a surface opposite the body.
- In yet another aspect, the invention provides a kit for preparing a form for filling a hollow cavity preparation in a tooth. The kit includes at least one sectional dental matrix comprising a curved strip of material. The strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of the cavity preparation and a surface of the tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the cavity preparation and the surface of the tooth to create the form for filling the cavity preparation. The strip has a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface. The kit also includes at least one separate dental matrix stabilizer including an elongated elastic body having a first end portion, a second opposite end portion, a middle portion connecting the first end portion and the second end portion, and a first side surface. The first side surface of the body includes a first outwardly extending protrusion on the first end portion, and the first side surface of the body further includes a second outwardly extending protrusion on the second end portion.
- In the kit, the dental matrix can have has a first thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a first plane horizontal to the strip that is less than a second thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at a second plane horizontal to the strip wherein the second plane is below the first plane. The strip of the dental matrix can have a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion, wherein the horizontally concave side surface forming the base portion is not vertically concave, and the horizontally concave side surface forming the upper portion of the dental matrix is vertically concave. The strip of the dental matrix can have a base portion and an upper portion integral with and extending upward from the base portion, and strip thickness between the concave side surface and the convex side surface at planes horizontal to the strip can decrease from lower to upper sections of the upper portion of the strip.
- In the kit, the first end portion of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer can include an area of material weakness extending toward the top surface and extending toward the bottom surface and extending toward a first end surface of the body whereby the first end portion can be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at the area of material weakness.
- In one exemplary form, the kit includes a matrix removal tool selected from the group consisting of pliers, tweezers or forceps. In another exemplary form, the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are anatomically shaped for different teeth. In still another exemplary form, the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are tooth specific for different teeth. In yet another exemplary form, the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are tooth type specific for different teeth. In still another exemplary form, the kit includes more than one of the dental matrix, and at least two of the matrix are tooth surface specific for different tooth surfaces.
- The kit may further include a separator ring for separating teeth and/or for creating adaptation pressure on the dental matrix stabilizer and/or the dental matrix. The separator ring comprises an elastic metallic body that terminates in a pair of spaced apart clamping ends. The clamping ends are dimensioned to separate teeth and/or create adaptation pressure on the dental matrix stabilizer and/or the dental matrix. Preferably, the clamping ends are translucent.
- The kit may further include a set of instructions for using the kit in filling the cavity preparation. The kit may further include a set of instructions for preparing the cavity preparation before using the kit. The set of instructions can be a disc (such as a DVD or CD) and/or printed materials (such as a book). The set of instructions can be a tooth preparation guide for preparing a cavity preparation according to the invention or a guide for restoring a tooth using the method of the invention. The kit can include more than one of the dental matrix stabilizer, and at least two of the dental matrix stabilizer are of different size. The kit can have a curing light.
- In the kit, the first outwardly extending protrusion of the dental matrix stabilizer can be spaced inward from a first end surface of the body of the dental matrix stabilizer, and the second outwardly extending protrusion of the dental matrix stabilizer can be spaced inward from a second end surface of the body of the dental matrix stabilizer. Preferably, the body of the dental matrix stabilizer is translucent. Preferably, the material of the curved strip of the dental matrix is translucent.
- In one form of the kit, the dental matrix comprises a second curved strip of translucent material. The second strip can have a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of a second cavity preparation in an adjacent tooth and a surface of the adjacent tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second cavity preparation and the surface of the adjacent tooth to create the form for filling the second cavity preparation. The second strip can have a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface wherein the second curved strip is joined to the curved strip.
- In another form of the kit, the dental matrix can have a second curved strip of translucent material wherein the second strip has a length from a first end to a second end sufficient to extend beyond a first vertical junction of a second cavity preparation in an adjacent tooth and a surface of the adjacent tooth and to extend beyond a second vertical junction of the second cavity preparation and the surface of the adjacent tooth to create the form for filling the second cavity preparation. The second strip can have a horizontally concave side surface and a horizontally convex side surface wherein the second curved strip and/or the curved strip have at least one throughhole.
- Therefore, it is one advantage of the invention to provide a single load, injection molded class II preparation, matrixing and composite filling technique and instruments.
- It is another advantage of the invention to provide a unique translucent anatomic series of matrices and stabilizing instruments for class III, IV and VI composites.
- It is still another advantage of the invention to provide a fully translucent matrix, separator and stabilizers (wedging action to replace wedge) that allows better vision (than metal matrices and separators) and full light curing access from occlusal and interproximal areas. This lateral and or simultaneous curing of a class II composite is an integral and unique feature of the invention. Heretofore the light curing has been based on curing from the occlusal (or chewing surface of the tooth) which requires several incremental layers.
- It is yet another advantage of the invention to provide a fully anatomic sectional matrix and stabilizers.
- It is still another advantage of the invention to provide a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously, including a back to back version. One of the two sectional matrices are designated as “back to back” and have a contact area specific cut out to allow a tighter contact. Non-limiting advantages are that there is only one thickness of material (e.g., Mylar™) between the approximating teeth which allows a tighter contact area; and also to avoid collapsing or buckling of one of the two rounded matrices where one of the two matrices will invert and create an undesirable concavity on the outer surface. This situation is uniquely critical to a Mylar™ type matrix but will also be beneficial to a metal version of the matrix.
- It is yet another advantage of the invention to provide a system to allow a completely convex surface to a filling in all axes. Previous systems create flat spots and a lack of bulbousness to the outer surface of the filling that encourage bacterial colonization and food impaction which is a pervasive problem in dentistry today. A completely convex filling surface that is naturally smooth from the resultant ideal anatomic shape of the matrix has inherent health benefits because of improved self cleansing and better action and access for a toothbrush and floss. Once the composite is trimmed back to fit the tooth, the surface loses its luster and smoothness and rarely is it polished back to the mirror like finish of composite that is injected against these matrix and then left untouched.
- It is still another advantage of the invention to provide a restorative and matrix system to be tooth specific. Previous systems are classified simply as anterior or posterior tooth specific. The system of the invention, because it is truly anatomic, is specific to each tooth or tooth type. For example, in some instances it will be specific to the mesial or distal (right side or left side of front teeth, front or back for back teeth) of the tooth. This is important because teeth have unique shapes that are specific to each tooth and each “side” of the tooth. For example the mesial of an upper incisor is significantly flatter than the distal surface. Because of the specificity of the system this feature is required. Significant adaptation and forming of generically shaped, non anatomic matrices is currently the standard. Because these conventional matrices do not fit the tooth precisely, time and energy is spent to crimp and press the matrix to conform to the tooth. In addition to time and energy wasted, the crimping and wedging create flat spots, indentations and other filling surface flaws.
- It is yet another advantage of the invention to provide a system that has matrices that are self adapting. Because the fit is natural with advantages of saved time, energy for the clinician, and a filling with a better, smoother, healthier, and more comfortable surface.
- It is still another advantage of the invention to provide a method and instruments for the restoration of a tooth where less finishing or removal of excess restorative material is a feature because of an intimate adaptation to a tooth being restored by a matrix that allows the injection molding of restorative material to occur without excess extruding in areas that are difficult to access. Better final result and times savings are some results.
- It is yet another advantage of the invention to provide a method, when there is deep decay or a previous filling that incorporates both the occlusal and interproximal surfaces, wherein the method is divided into the occlusal first and then the interproximal surfaces last. In other words, the occlusal and deep interproximal are prepared and then filled. Then the interproximal is prepared or re-prepared with the ideal saucer or slice shape so that the cavity configuration will allow for the ideal “C factor” (cavity configuration factor) and so that is never deeper than two millimeters in the axial dimension. Then the injection molding, single load technique can be utilized with the components of the system of the invention.
- It is still another advantage of the invention to provide a method and instruments for the restoration of a tooth where feather and knife edge cavity margins are produced. Combined with the overall saucer shape of the cavity preparation, it creates a C Factor (cavity configuration factor) that can be as small as 1/1 or 1. Typical C factors for traditional class II cavity preparations are in the range of 2/1 or 3/1 or higher. The higher the C factor, the greater the risk that areas of composite will pull away from a tooth surface during polymerization leaving a resulting gap; or creating stress to the tooth causing enamel fractures and/or post-operative symptoms.
- It is yet another advantage of the invention to provide a method for the restoration of a posterior tooth having an original shape including a top surface and an interproximal surface. The unique preparation design, restorative protocol and kit for filling and finishing are interdependent on each aspect to create a significant advancement in this procedure. The final outcome is a tooth that will be less weakened and therefore more fracture resistant. The C factor is mitigated, and marginal integrity and filling strength are greatly improved with the method.
- It is still another advantage of the invention to provide a method including simultaneously light curing of a bonding agent and a flowable composite and paste composite resin contained in the cavity preparation. Preferably, the curing light is simultaneously directed at the top surface of the tooth, at a buccal portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth, and a lingual portion of the interproximal surface of the tooth. Buccal-Lingual curing of a Class II restoration is unique to this advancement, heretofore has been from largely from the occlusal.
- It is yet another advantage of the invention to provide a method for the restoration of a tooth wherein the filled cavity preparation of the interproximal area is injection molded rather than layered and therefore seamless. Injection of the second and third components, flowable composite and paste composite into an existing pool of uncured and therefore fluid environment allows consistent bubble and gap formation.
- The combination of one or more features of the invention allows the radical departure from traditional class II composite preparations and fillings which have a significant failure rate, as high as 50% higher failure rate than Class II silver amalgam fillings. (See, for example, Van Nieuwenhuysen et al., “Long-term evaluation of extensive restorations in permanent teeth”, J Dent. 2003, 31:395-405; and Sjogren et al., “Survival time of class II molar restorations in relation to patient and dental health insurance costs for treatment”, Swed Dent J. 2002, 26:59-66; and Mjor et al., “Placement and replacement of restorations in primary teeth. Acta Odontol Scand. 2002, 60:25-28.)
- Although Class II composites have been performed for at least 25 years, the cavity form has maintained a “mechanical lock” created by undercuts that physically retain the filling. This was a necessary design for non-bonded silver amalgam. Unfortunately these “box” forms leave weakened, undermined, vulnerable tooth structure and the tooth often begins to fracture over time. Cracked and fractured teeth are now the third leading cause of tooth loss in industrialized nations. It is therefore another advantage of the invention to provide an excellent seal and high surface area for enamel rod engagement. This overall system (tooth preparation, matrix system, injection molded filling process) allows for a non mechanical undercut cavity and instead relies on adhesion to enamel rods (pores of the enamel opened up during conditioning/etching of enamel) and the filling is retained with the same robust and permanent adhesion enjoyed by cosmetic veneering of front teeth which have no mechanical retention, only enamel adhesion.
- These and other features, aspects, and advantages of the present invention will become better understood upon consideration of the following detailed description, drawings, and appended claims.
-
FIG. 1 is a top view of the light curing step of a tooth restoration method according to the invention. -
FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line 2-2 ofFIG. 1 . -
FIG. 3 is a top perspective view of the matrix insertion step of the method according to the invention. -
FIG. 4 is a top perspective view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer insertion step of the method according to the invention. -
FIG. 5 is a top perspective view of the ring separator insertion step of the method according to the invention. -
FIG. 6 is a top perspective view of the beginning of the light curing step of the method according to the invention. -
FIG. 7 is a top perspective view of the light curing step of the method according to the invention. -
FIG. 8 is a detailed view taken along line 8-8 ofFIG. 7 showing an alternative separator ring according to the invention. -
FIG. 9 is a top view of one embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 10 is a side cross-sectional view of a dental matrix according to the invention. -
FIG. 11 is a side cross-sectional view of another dental matrix according to the invention. -
FIG. 12 is a top view of a light curing device according to the invention. -
FIG. 12A is a top view of another version of a light curing device according to the invention. - FIG. 12AA is a view of the light curing device of
FIG. 12A taken along line 12AA-12AA ofFIG. 12A . -
FIG. 12B is a top view of the light curing device ofFIG. 12A showing the light guides in phantom in their flexed position. -
FIG. 12C is a top view of yet another version of a light curing device according to the invention. -
FIG. 12D is a top view of still another version of a light curing device according to the invention. -
FIG. 12E is a bottom view of yet another version of a light curing device according to the invention. -
FIG. 12F is a side view of the light curing device ofFIG. 12E . -
FIG. 12G is a top view of yet another version of a light curing device according to the invention. -
FIG. 12H is a side view of still another version of a light curing device according to the invention. -
FIG. 12I is a view of the light curing device ofFIG. 12H taken along line 12I-12I ofFIG. 12H . -
FIG. 13 is a top view of another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the dental matrix ofFIG. 10 taken along line 14-14 ofFIG. 10 . -
FIG. 15 is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15B is a top view of still another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15C is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15B . -
FIG. 15D is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15E is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15D . -
FIG. 15F is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15D . -
FIG. 15G is a top view of still another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15H is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15G . -
FIG. 15I is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15G . -
FIG. 15J is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15K is a front view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15J . -
FIG. 15L is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15J . -
FIG. 15M is a top view of still another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15N is a cross-sectional view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15M taken alongline 15N-15N ofFIG. 15M . -
FIG. 15O is a bottom view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15M . -
FIG. 15P is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15M . -
FIG. 15Q is a top view of yet another embodiment of an interproximal dental matrix stabilizer according to the invention. -
FIG. 15R is a cross-sectional view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15Q taken alongline 15R-15R ofFIG. 15Q . -
FIG. 15S is a bottom view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15Q . -
FIG. 15T is a side view of the interproximal dental matrix stabilizer ofFIG. 15Q . -
FIG. 16 is a top perspective view of another dental matrix according to the invention. -
FIG. 17 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix ofFIG. 16 taken along line 17-17 ofFIG. 16 . -
FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix ofFIGS. 16 and 17 taken along line 18-18 ofFIG. 17 . -
FIG. 19 is a top perspective view of yet another dental matrix according to the invention. -
FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix ofFIG. 19 taken along line 20-20 ofFIG. 19 . -
FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix ofFIGS. 19 and 20 taken along line 21-21 ofFIG. 20 . -
FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view, similar toFIG. 21 , of yet another dental matrix according to the invention. -
FIG. 23 is a top perspective view of still another dental matrix according to the invention. -
FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view of the matrix ofFIG. 23 taken along line 24-24 ofFIG. 23 . -
FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the use of another alternative separator ring according to the invention. -
FIG. 26 is a bottom view of the separator ring shown inFIG. 25 . -
FIG. 27 is a front view of the separator ring shown inFIG. 25 . -
FIG. 28 is a side view of the separator ring shown inFIG. 25 . -
FIG. 29 is a top view of three adjacent teeth having three different cavity preparations. -
FIG. 30 is a cross-sectional view of a tooth ofFIG. 29 taken along line 30-30 ofFIG. 29 . -
FIG. 31 is a cross-sectional view of a tooth ofFIG. 29 taken along line 31-31 ofFIG. 29 . - Like reference numerals will be used to refer to like parts from Figure to Figure in the following description of the drawings.
- Turning to
FIGS. 1-8 , there is shown various steps and devices in an example method according to the invention for the restoration of a tooth. In a first step, the dentist locates a tooth having a cavity. Referring toFIG. 3 , there is shown atooth 12 having a topocclusal surface 14 and aninterproximal side surface 16. Ahollow cavity preparation 18 has been prepared intooth 12. Thehollow cavity preparation 18 includes aninner surface 19, aside surface 20, anopposite side surface 21 and abottom surface 22. Using the well known classification system developed by Dr. G. V. Black in 1908, this would be a Class II cavity involving theinterproximal side surface 16 and topocclusal surface 14 oftooth 12, which may be a premolar or molar. - The tools and techniques for removing a portion of the
top surface 14 of thetooth 12 and a portion of theinterproximal surface 16 of thetooth 12 to form thehollow cavity preparation 18 are well known in the art and therefore will not be explained further. However, the ClassII cavity preparation 18 ofFIG. 3 is saucer shaped when viewed from above and does not have the usual box-like shape of a conventional Class II cavity preparation. Specifically, the ends 17 a, 17 b of thecavity preparation 18 are not tangential to the tooth outside surface. Also, thecavity preparation 18 does not extend inward more than two millimeters inward from theinterproximal side surface 16. - After preparation of the saucer shaped Class
II cavity preparation 18 in thetooth 12 ofFIG. 3 , a wedge (not shown) is inserted between theinterproximal surface 16 of thetooth 12 and theinterproximal surface 26 ofadjacent tooth 24 to create a gap between thetooth 12 and thetooth 24. Known wedges are suitable for this “pre-wedging” step. The wedge is removed, and a sectional anatomic translucent anatomicdental matrix 30 is inserted between thetooth 12 and thetooth 24 as shown inFIGS. 3 and 4 . Thedental matrix 30 will be described in further detail below. - Looking at
FIGS. 4 and 5 , the clear plastic anatomicalsectional matrix 30 is placed around thetooth 12 maintaining anatomic root adaptation contact using an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 according to the invention. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 will be described in further detail below. A metallicelastic separator ring 78 is then placed in the interproximal embrasure to create slight tooth separation and additional adaptation pressure on the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 and/or thematrix 30. - The
cavity preparation 18 intooth 12 is then etched with liquid and/or gel phosphoric acid, about 2 millimeters past the margins. Thecavity preparation 18 intooth 12 is then rinsed and dried. A lightly filled or unfilled light curable resin tooth bonding agent is then applied totooth 12 covering theentire cavity preparation 18 and about 0.5-1.5 millimeters past the margins. The resin tooth bonding agent is then air thinned except onsurface 22 where a small pool of resin tooth bonding agent is maintained. The resin tooth bonding agent is not light cured at this point. Resin tooth bonding agents improve composite to enamel and/or dentin bonding. One example resin tooth bonding agent is available under the tradename OptiBond Solo Plus®. - A light curable flowable composite resin is then injected directly into the pool of resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible) without incorporating bubbles. A tiny amount of the light curable flowable composite resin is expressed before placement to ensure that there is no air in the cannula. The light curable flowable composite and resin tooth bonding agent are not light cured at this point. Generally, light curable flowable composite resins contain 20-25 percent less filler in the light curable polymeric material than nonflowable paste materials. Light curable flowable composite resins are available under tradenames such as Filtek™, Flow-It™, EsthetX®, Revolution®, AeliteFlo®, PermaFlo®, Dyract Flow®, Tetric®, and Heliomolar®. Light curable resins are preferred as light cured resins are more color stable than chemically cured resins.
- A light curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent without creating air bubbles, allowing the composite resin to displace most of the lesser filled flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible). Composite resins are available under tradenames such as 3M Z100™, 3M Filtek Supreme™, and Prodigy®. The next steps are burnishing, carving the anatomy and carving excess composite. There is no need to use a condenser or plugger.
- The top
occlusal surface 14 of the filled cavity preparation is then cured using a curing light such as high intensity light emitting diode (LED) lights, plasma-arc curing lights, halogen lights, and laser lights. The interproximal region of the filled cavity preparation is cured using adental curing light 80 with a light guide having two separate distal sections that allow for simultaneous curing of the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the filled cavity preparation while applying air cooling from an air syringe or one curing light according to the invention. Thus, lateral light curing is used. Alternatively, two individual curing lights can be used. Theseparator ring 78 and interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 are then removed and the simultaneous curing of the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the filled cavity preparation is then repeated using thedental curing light 80 that will be described in further detail below. Thematrix 30 is then removed, and the restoredtooth 12 is polished with discs, strips, and rubber tipped and carbide burs. - In cases where the
cavity preparation 18 must extend inward more than about two millimeters from theinterproximal side surface 16, an alternative method may be used. In this alternative method, a base material, such as a flowable composite, a glass ionomer material or a paste composite resin, is first used to build up the restoration such that the cured base material is about two millimeters or less from the desired restored tooth interproximal outside surface. However, the cured base material does not extend to the edge of thecavity preparation 18 in the tooth. A lightly filled or unfilled light curable resin tooth bonding agent is then applied to the cured base material in thecavity preparation 18 and about 0.5-1.5 millimeters past the margins. The resin tooth bonding agent is then air thinned except onsurface 22 where a small pool of resin tooth bonding agent is maintained. The resin tooth bonding agent is not light cured at this point. - A light curable flowable composite resin is then injected directly into the pool of resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible) without incorporating bubbles. A tiny amount of the light curable flowable composite resin is expressed before placement to ensure that there is no air in the cannula. The light curable flowable composite and resin tooth bonding agent are not light cured at this point. A light curable paste composite resin is then extruded into the pool of flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent without creating air bubbles, allowing the composite resin to displace most of the lesser filled flowable composite resin and resin tooth bonding agent (under magnification if possible). The next steps are burnishing, carving the anatomy and carving excess composite. The light curing process then proceeds as above.
- An example embodiment of a sectional translucent anatomic
dental matrix 30 that can be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. While thematrix 30 has been illustrated and described herein in the context of a Class II restoration, thematrix 30 and all other matrices described herein are also suitable for Class III and Class IV restorations. Looking atFIGS. 3 and 10 , thedental matrix 30 includes acurved strip 32 of translucent material. Thedental matrix 30 can be formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. Thestrip 32 has a length running from afirst end 34 to asecond end 36 of thedental matrix 30. The length of thedental matrix 30 is sufficient to extend beyond a firstvertical junction 23L of theinterproximal cavity preparation 18 and aninterproximal surface 16 of thetooth 12 and to extend beyond a secondvertical junction 23R of theinterproximal cavity preparation 18 and theinterproximal surface 16 of thetooth 12 to create the form for filling theinterproximal cavity preparation 18. - The
strip 32 of thedental matrix 30 has a horizontallyconcave side surface 38 and a horizontally convex side surface 40 (seeFIG. 10 ). Theconcave side surface 38 and theconvex side surface 40 extend from thefirst end 34 to thesecond end 36 of thedental matrix 30. Thestrip 32 of thedental matrix 30 also has abase portion 42 and anupper portion 44 integral with and extending upward from thebase portion 42 of thedental matrix 30. The horizontallyconcave side surface 38 forming thebase portion 42 is not vertically concave (that is, a cross-section of thebase portion 42 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to abottom surface 46 of thedental matrix 30. The horizontallyconcave side surface 38 forming theupper portion 44 of thedental matrix 30 is vertically concave. SeeFIG. 10 . The horizontallyconcave side surface 38 is anatomic in that the horizontallyconcave side surface 38 has an inner surface that that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the region of the natural tooth being restored. - Preferably, the
matrix 30 is anatomically shaped. Thematrix 30 can be tooth specific. By “tooth specific” it is meant that the matrix is configured to conform to the shape of the outer surface of the specific natural tooth being restored such as (without limitation) an upper right second molar. Thematrix 30 can be tooth type specific. By “tooth type specific” it is meant that the matrix is configured to conform to the shape of the outer surface of the specific type of natural tooth being restored such as (without limitation) an upper molar. Thematrix 30 can be tooth surface specific. By “tooth surface specific” it is meant that the matrix is configured to conform to the shape of the outer surface of the specific natural tooth surface being restored such as (without limitation) an upper right first molar mesial surface. - Turning to
FIG. 11 , there is shown another embodiment of a sectional translucent anatomic dental matrix 30A. In the dental matrix 30A, the strip thickness between theconcave side surface 38A and theconvex side surface 40A at planes horizontal to thestrip 32A decreases from lower to upper sections of thestrip 32A. Thus, the clear plastic anatomical matrix 30A has variable thickness to allow the thinner portion for the tooth contact area and the thicker portion at the gingival area. The tapering (decrease in thickness) of thestrip 32A can begin at any location above thebottom surface 46A of thestrip 32A. However, in one version of thestrip 32A, the tapering of thickness begins in the upper portion 44A. In other words, thebase portion 42A has uniform thickness. The dental matrix 30A can be formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. - Turning to
FIG. 14 , there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent anatomicdental matrix 30B. In thedental matrix 30B, thestrip 32B has afirst side surface 38B and asecond side surface 40B. Thefirst side surface 38B has an intermediate horizontallyconvex section 47B between a first horizontallyconcave section 49A and a second horizontallyconcave section 49B. The intermediate horizontallyconvex section 47B provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward furcation and/or fluting from decay due to the age of the patient. The intermediate horizontallyconvex section 47B can begin at any location above the bottom surface of thestrip 32B. Thedental matrix 30B can be formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. - An example embodiment of an interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 that can be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Looking atFIGS. 4 and 9 , the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 having afirst end portion 51, a secondopposite end portion 52, amiddle portion 53 connecting thefirst end portion 51 and thesecond end portion 52, afirst side surface 54, asecond side surface 55, atop surface 56 and abottom surface 57. Thefirst end portion 51 has afirst throughhole 58 extending from thetop surface 56 to thebottom surface 57 of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48. Thesecond end portion 52 has asecond throughhole 59 extending from thetop surface 56 to thebottom surface 57 of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48. - The
first end portion 51 includes anarea 61 of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 and extends toward thebottom surface 57 and extends toward afirst end surface 62 of thebody 50. Thearea 61 of material weakness extends from thefirst throughhole 58 to thefirst end surface 62 of thebody 50. This allows thefirst end portion 51 to be separated intoseparate end members area 61 of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48. Preferably,end members area 61 of material weakness can be formed with a material of lower shear strength than the other material of thedental matrix stabilizer 48, or can be formed by including perforations or other like open areas in thearea 61 of material weakness. - The
second end portion 52 includes anarea 65 of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 and extends toward thebottom surface 57 and extends toward asecond end surface 66 of thebody 50. Thearea 65 of material weakness extends from thesecond throughhole 59 to thesecond end surface 66 of thebody 50. This allows thesecond end portion 52 to be separated intoseparate end members area 65 of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48. Preferably,end members area 65 of material weakness can be formed with a material of lower shear strength than the other material of thedental matrix stabilizer 48, or can be formed by including perforations or other like open areas in thearea 65 of material weakness. - The
top surface 56 of thebody 50 of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 includes a first pair of upper side-by-side depressions middle portion 53 of thebody 50, and thebottom surface 57 of thebody 50 includes a second pair of analogous lower side-by-side depressions (not shown) in the middle portion of the body. The first pair of upper side-by-side depressions inner surfaces - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48, thefirst side surface 54 of thebody 50 includes acurved protrusion 75 f located near thefirst throughhole 58 and acurved protrusion 76 f located near thesecond throughhole 59. Likewise, thesecond side surface 55 of thebody 50 includes acurved protrusion 75 b located near thefirst throughhole 58 and acurved protrusion 76 b located near thesecond throughhole 59. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone elastomer or a polyurethane elastomer. - Turning to
FIG. 13 , there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48A which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50A having afirst end portion 51A, a secondopposite end portion 52A, amiddle portion 53A connecting thefirst end portion 51A and thesecond end portion 52A, afirst side surface 54A, asecond side surface 55A, atop surface 56A and a bottom surface (not shown). Thefirst end portion 51A has afirst throughhole 58A extending from thetop surface 56A to the bottom surface of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48A. Thesecond end portion 52A has asecond throughhole 59A extending from thetop surface 56A to the bottom surface of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48A. - The
first end portion 51A includes anarea 61A of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56A and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward afirst end surface 62A of thebody 50A. Thearea 61A of material weakness extends from thefirst throughhole 58A to thefirst end surface 62A of thebody 50A. This allows thefirst end portion 51A to be separated intoseparate end members area 61A of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48A. Preferably,end members - The
second end portion 52A includes anarea 65A of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56A and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward asecond end surface 66A of thebody 50A. Thearea 65A of material weakness extends from thesecond throughhole 59A to thesecond end surface 66A of thebody 50A. This allows thesecond end portion 52A to be separated intoseparate end members area 65A of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48A. Preferably,end members - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48A, thefirst side surface 54A of thebody 50A includes acurved protrusion 75 f located near thefirst throughhole 58A and acurved protrusion 76 f located near thesecond throughhole 59A. Likewise, thesecond side surface 55A of thebody 50A includes acurved protrusion 75 b located near thefirst throughhole 58A and acurved protrusion 76 b located near thesecond throughhole 59A. - In interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48A, thefirst side surface 54A of thebody 50A includes a firstcurved protrusion 77 f located near an intermediate vertical plane of thebody 50A. Likewise, thesecond side surface 55A of thebody 50A includes a secondcurved protrusion 77 b located near the intermediate vertical plane of thebody 50A. Thecurved protrusions dental matrix 30B having the intermediate horizontallyconvex section 47B that provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward decay due to the age of the patient. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48A can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - Turning to
FIG. 15 , there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48B which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50B having afirst end portion 51B, a secondopposite end portion 52B, amiddle portion 53B connecting thefirst end portion 51B and thesecond end portion 52B, afirst side surface 54B, a second side surface 55B, a top surface 56B and a bottom surface (not shown). - The
first end portion 51B includes anarea 61B of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56B and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward afirst end surface 62B of thebody 50B. Thearea 61B of material weakness extends from an inner portion of thefirst end portion 51B to thefirst end surface 62B of thebody 50B. This allows thefirst end portion 51B to be separated intoseparate end members area 61B of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48B. Preferably,end members - The
second end portion 52B includes anarea 65B of material weakness that extends toward the top surface 56B and extends toward the bottom surface and extends toward asecond end surface 66B of thebody 50B. Thearea 65B of material weakness extends from an inner portion of thesecond end portion 52B to thesecond end surface 66B of thebody 50B. This allows thesecond end portion 52B to be separated intoseparate end members area 65B of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48B. Preferably,end members - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48B, thefirst side surface 54B of thebody 50B includes acurved protrusion 75 f and acurved protrusion 76 f. Likewise, the second side surface 55B of thebody 50B includes acurved protrusion 75 b and acurved protrusion 76 b. - In interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48B, thefirst side surface 54B of thebody 50B includes a firstcurved protrusion 77 f located near an intermediate vertical plane of thebody 50B. Likewise, the second side surface 55B of thebody 50B includes a secondcurved protrusion 77 b located near the intermediate vertical plane of thebody 50B. Thecurved protrusions dental matrix 30B having the intermediate horizontallyconvex section 47B that provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward decay due to the age of the patient. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48B can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - Turning now to
FIGS. 15B and 15C , there is shown yet another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 d which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 d having afirst end portion 51 d, a secondopposite end portion 52 d, amiddle portion 53 d connecting thefirst end portion 51 d and thesecond end portion 52 d, afirst side surface 54 d, asecond side surface 55 d, atop surface 56 d and abottom surface 57 d. Thefirst end portion 51 d extends to afirst end surface 62 d of thebody 50 d. Thesecond end portion 52 d extends to asecond end surface 66 d of thebody 50 d. Thetop surface 56 d may includeindicia 65 d that indicate which side is placed upward away from the gingival during use. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 d, thefirst side surface 54 d of thebody 50 d includes acurved protrusion 75 f and acurved protrusion 76 f. Likewise, thesecond side surface 55 d of thebody 50 d includes acurved protrusion 75 b and acurved protrusion 76 b. - In interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 d, thefirst side surface 54 d of thebody 50 d includes a firstcurved protrusion 77 f located near an intermediate vertical plane of thebody 50 d. Likewise, thesecond side surface 55 d of thebody 50 d includes a secondcurved protrusion 77 b located near the intermediate vertical plane of thebody 50 d. Thecurved protrusions dental matrix 30B having the intermediate horizontallyconvex section 47B that provides contact with tooth surface that may have inward decay due to the age of the patient. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 d can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - The
top surface 56 d of thebody 50 d of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 d includes a first pair of upper side-by-side depressions middle portion 53 d of thebody 50 d. The first pair of upper side-by-side depressions inner surfaces bottom surface 57 d of thebody 50 d of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 d includes alower concavity 171L in themiddle portion 53 d of thebody 50 d. Thelower concavity 171L limits the application of undesired pressure on the interdental gingival when the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 d is positioned between a patient's teeth. - Turning now to
FIGS. 15D to 15F , there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 e which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 e having a disc shapedfirst end portion 51 e, a disc shaped secondopposite end portion 52 e, amiddle portion 53 e connecting thefirst end portion 51 e and thesecond end portion 52 e, afirst side surface 54 e, asecond side surface 55 e, atop surface 56 e and abottom surface 57 e. Thefirst end portion 51 e extends to afirst end surface 58 e of thebody 50 e. Thesecond end portion 52 e extends to asecond end surface 59 e of thebody 50 e. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 e can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 e, themiddle portion 53 e includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)first section 61 e, a firstintermediate section 62 e, a central rod-like section 63 e, a secondintermediate section 64 e, and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)second section 65 e. As shown in the top view ofFIG. 15D , the section of thefirst side surface 54 e that is part of thefirst section 61 e extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 e to the firstintermediate section 62 e. The section of thefirst side surface 54 e that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thefirst side surface 54 e that is part of thesecond section 65 e extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 e to the secondintermediate section 64 e. The section of thefirst side surface 54 e that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e. - Likewise, the section of the
second side surface 55 e that is part of thefirst section 61 e extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 e to the firstintermediate section 62 e. The section of thesecond side surface 55 e that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thesecond side surface 55 e that is part of thesecond section 65 e extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 e to the secondintermediate section 64 e. The section of thesecond side surface 55 e that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 e extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 e and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e. - As shown in the side view of
FIG. 15E , the section of thetop surface 56 e that is part of thefirst section 61 e extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 e to the firstintermediate section 62 e and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 e. The section of thetop surface 56 e that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thetop surface 56 e that is part of thesecond section 65 e extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 e to the secondintermediate section 64 e and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 e. The section of thetop surface 56 e that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e. - Likewise, the section of the
bottom surface 57 e that is part of thefirst section 61 e extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 e to the firstintermediate section 62 e and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 e. The section of thebottom surface 57 e that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thebottom surface 57 e that is part of thesecond section 65 e extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 e to the secondintermediate section 64 e and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 e. The section of thebottom surface 57 e that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e. - The
body 50 e includes anarea 66 e of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 e and extends toward thebottom surface 57 e and extends to thefirst end surface 58 e of thebody 50 e. Thearea 66 e of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the firstintermediate section 62 e to thefirst end surface 58 e of thebody 50 e. This allows thefirst end portion 51 e, thefirst section 61 e and part of the firstintermediate section 62 e to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 66 e of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 e. Likewise, thebody 50 e includes anarea 67 e of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 e and extends toward thebottom surface 57 e and extends to thesecond end surface 59 e of thebody 50 e. Thearea 67 e of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the secondintermediate section 64 e to thesecond end surface 59 e of thebody 50 e. This allows thesecond end portion 52 e, thesecond section 65 e and part of the secondintermediate section 64 e to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 67 e of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 e. - Turning now to
FIGS. 15G to 15I , there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 f which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 f having a disc shapedfirst end portion 51 f, a disc shaped secondopposite end portion 52 f, amiddle portion 53 f connecting thefirst end portion 51 f and thesecond end portion 52 f, afirst side surface 54 f, asecond side surface 55 f, atop surface 56 f and abottom surface 57 f. Thefirst end portion 51 f extends to afirst end surface 58 f of thebody 50 f. Thesecond end portion 52 f extends to asecond end surface 59 f of thebody 50 f. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 f can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 f, themiddle portion 53 f includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)first section 61 f, a firstintermediate section 62 f, acentral section 63 f, a secondintermediate section 64 f, and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)second section 65 f. As shown in the top view ofFIG. 15G , the section of thefirst side surface 54 f that is part of thefirst section 61 f extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 f to the firstintermediate section 62 f. The section of thefirst side surface 54 f that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 f which hascylindrical end sections spherical center section 263 f. The section of thefirst side surface 54 f that is part of thesecond section 65 f extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 f to the secondintermediate section 64 f. The section of thefirst side surface 54 f that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 f. - Likewise, the section of the
second side surface 55 f that is part of thefirst section 61 f extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 f to the firstintermediate section 62 f. The section of thesecond side surface 55 f that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 f which hascylindrical end sections spherical center section 263 f. The section of thesecond side surface 55 f that is part of thesecond section 65 f extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 f to the secondintermediate section 64 f. The section of thesecond side surface 55 f that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 f extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 f and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 f. - As shown in the side view of
FIG. 15H , the section of thetop surface 56 f that is part of thefirst section 61 f extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 f to the firstintermediate section 62 f and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 f. The section of thetop surface 56 f that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 f. The section of thetop surface 56 f that is part of thesecond section 65 f extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 f to the secondintermediate section 64 f and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 f. The section of thetop surface 56 f that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 f. - Likewise, the section of the
bottom surface 57 f that is part of thefirst section 61 f extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 f to the firstintermediate section 62 f and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 f. The section of thebottom surface 57 f that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 f. The section of thebottom surface 57 f that is part of thesecond section 65 f extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 f to the secondintermediate section 64 f and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 f. The section of thebottom surface 57 f that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 f extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 f. - The
body 50 f includes anarea 66 f of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 f and extends toward thebottom surface 57 f and extends to thefirst end surface 58 f of thebody 50 f. Thearea 66 f of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the firstintermediate section 62 f to thefirst end surface 58 f of thebody 50 f. This allows thefirst end portion 51 f, thefirst section 61 e and part of the firstintermediate section 62 f to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 66 f of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 f. Likewise, thebody 50 f includes anarea 67 f of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 f and extends toward thebottom surface 57 f and extends to thesecond end surface 59 f of thebody 50 f. Thearea 67 f of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the secondintermediate section 64 f to thesecond end surface 59 f of thebody 50 f. This allows thesecond end portion 52 f, thesecond section 65 f and part of the secondintermediate section 64 f to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 67 f of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 f. - Turning now to
FIGS. 15J to 15L , there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 g which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 g having a disc shapedfirst end portion 51 g, a disc shaped secondopposite end portion 52 g, amiddle portion 53 g connecting thefirst end portion 51 g and thesecond end portion 52 g, afirst side surface 54 g, a second side surface 55 g, atop surface 56 g and abottom surface 57 g. Thefirst end portion 51 g extends to afirst end surface 58 g of thebody 50 g. Thesecond end portion 52 g extends to asecond end surface 59 g of thebody 50 g. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 g can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 g, themiddle portion 53 g includes a generally cylindrical first section 61 g, a first spherical intermediate section 62 g, a central cylindrical section 63 g, a second spherical intermediate section 64 g, and a generally cylindrical second section 65 g. - Turning now to
FIGS. 15M to 15P there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 h which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 h having a generally disc shapedfirst end portion 51 h, a generally disc shaped secondopposite end portion 52 h, amiddle portion 53 h connecting thefirst end portion 51 h and thesecond end portion 52 h, a first side surface 54 h, asecond side surface 55 h, atop surface 56 h and abottom surface 57 h. Thefirst end portion 51 h extends to afirst end surface 58 h of thebody 50 h. Thesecond end portion 52 h extends to asecond end surface 59 h of thebody 50 h. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 h can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 h, themiddle portion 53 h includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)first section 61 h, a firstintermediate section 62 h, a central rod-like section 63 h, a secondintermediate section 64 h, and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)second section 65 h. As shown in the top view ofFIG. 15M , the section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of thefirst section 61 h extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 h to the firstintermediate section 62 h. The section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h which is tapered inward near its center. The section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of thesecond section 65 h extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 h to the secondintermediate section 64 h. The section of the first side surface 54 h that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h. - Likewise, the section of the
second side surface 55 h that is part of thefirst section 61 h extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 h to the firstintermediate section 62 h. The section of thesecond side surface 55 h that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thesecond side surface 55 h that is part of thesecond section 65 h extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 h to the secondintermediate section 64 h. The section of thesecond side surface 55 h that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 h extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 h and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h. - As shown in the side view of
FIG. 15N , the section of thetop surface 56 h that is part of thefirst section 61 h extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 h to the firstintermediate section 62 h and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 h. The section of thetop surface 56 h that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 h extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 e which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thetop surface 56 h that is part of thesecond section 65 h extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 h to the secondintermediate section 64 h and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 h. The section of thetop surface 56 h that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 h extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h. - Likewise, the section of the
bottom surface 57 h that is part of thefirst section 61 h extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 h to the firstintermediate section 62 h and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 h. The section of thebottom surface 57 h that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 h extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h which is tapered inward near its center. The section of thebottom surface 57 h that is part of thesecond section 65 h extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 h to the secondintermediate section 64 h and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 h. The section of thebottom surface 57 h that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 e extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 h. - The
body 50 h includes anarea 66 h of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 h and extends toward thebottom surface 57 h and extends to thefirst end surface 58 h of thebody 50 h. Thearea 66 h of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the firstintermediate section 62 h to thefirst end surface 58 h of thebody 50 h. This allows thefirst end portion 51 h, thefirst section 61 h and part of the firstintermediate section 62 h to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 66 h of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 h. Likewise, thebody 50 h includes anarea 67 h of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 h and extends toward thebottom surface 57 h and extends to thesecond end surface 59 h of thebody 50 h. Thearea 67 h of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the secondintermediate section 64 h to thesecond end surface 59 h of thebody 50 h. This allows thesecond end portion 52 h, thesecond section 65 h and part of the secondintermediate section 64 h to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 67 h of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 h. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 h, there is aninward concavity 71 h in thebottom surface 57 h in an inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 h, thecentral section 63 h, and an inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 h. Theinward concavity 71 h has a longitudinal axis X and a lateral axis Y transverse to the longitudinal axis X. The longitudinal axis X extend toward thefirst end portion 51 h and thesecond end portion 52 h. The longitudinal axis X is longer than the lateral axis Y. The 71 h limits the application of undesired pressure on the interdental gingival when the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 h is positioned between a patient's teeth. Also, thefirst end portion 51 h has aflat bottom surface 76 h, and thesecond end portion 52 h has aflat bottom surface 77 h. - Turning now to
FIGS. 15Q to 15T , there is shown another embodiment of an interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 i which includes an elongated translucent (preferably transparent)elastic body 50 i having a generally disc shapedfirst end portion 51 i, a generally disc shaped secondopposite end portion 52 i, amiddle portion 53 i connecting thefirst end portion 51 i and thesecond end portion 52 i, afirst side surface 54 i, a second side surface 55 i, atop surface 56 i and a bottom surface 57 i. Thefirst end portion 51 i extends to afirst end surface 58 i of thebody 50 i. Thesecond end portion 52 i extends to asecond end surface 59 i of thebody 50 i. The interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 i can be formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 i, themiddle portion 53 i includes a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)first section 61 i, a firstintermediate section 62 i, acentral section 63 i, a secondintermediate section 64 i, and a generally rectangular (in vertical cross-section)second section 65 i. As shown in the top view ofFIG. 15Q , the section of thefirst side surface 54 i that is part of thefirst section 61 i extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 i to the firstintermediate section 62 i. The section of thefirst side surface 54 i that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 i which hascylindrical end sections 163 i, 363 i on both sides of a generallyspherical center section 263 i. The section of thefirst side surface 54 i that is part of thesecond section 65 i extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 i to the secondintermediate section 64 i. The section of thefirst side surface 54 i that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 i. - Likewise, the section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the
first section 61 i extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 i to the firstintermediate section 62 i. The section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the firstintermediate section 62 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from thefirst section 61 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral section 63 i which hascylindrical end sections 163 i, 363 i on both sides of a generallyspherical center section 263 i. The section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of thesecond section 65 i extends inward linearly from thesecond end portion 52 i to the secondintermediate section 64 i. The section of the second side surface 55 i that is part of the secondintermediate section 64 i extends in an outward arcuate manner from thesecond section 65 i and then back inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 i. - As shown in the side view of
FIG. 15R , the section of thetop surface 56 i that is part of thefirst section 61 i extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 i to the firstintermediate section 62 i and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 i. The section of thetop surface 56 i that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 i. The section of thetop surface 56 i that is part of thesecond section 65 i extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 i to the secondintermediate section 64 i and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 i. The section of thetop surface 56 i that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 i. - Likewise, the section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the
first section 61 i extends linearly inward from thefirst end portion 51 i to the firstintermediate section 62 i and through part of the firstintermediate section 62 i. The section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 i. The section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of thesecond section 65 i extends linearly inward from thesecond end portion 52 i to the secondintermediate section 64 i and through part of the secondintermediate section 64 i. The section of the bottom surface 57 i that is part of the inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 i extends inward in an arcuate manner to thecentral tubular section 63 i. - The
body 50 i includes anarea 66 i of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 i and extends toward the bottom surface 57 i and extends to thefirst end surface 58 i of thebody 50 i. Thearea 66 i of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the firstintermediate section 62 i to thefirst end surface 58 i of thebody 50 i. This allows thefirst end portion 51 i, thefirst section 61 i and part of the firstintermediate section 62 i to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 66 i of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 i. Likewise, thebody 50 i includes anarea 67 i of material weakness that extends toward thetop surface 56 i and extends toward the bottom surface 57 i and extends to thesecond end surface 59 i of thebody 50 i. Thearea 67 i of material weakness extends from an inner portion of the secondintermediate section 64 i to thesecond end surface 59 i of thebody 50 i. This allows thesecond end portion 52 i thesecond section 65 i and part of the secondintermediate section 64 i to be separated into separate end members by application of a separation force at thearea 67 i of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 i. - In the interproximal
dental matrix stabilizer 48 i, there is aninward concavity 71 i in the bottom surface 57 i in an inward section of the firstintermediate section 62 i, thecentral section 63 i, and an inward section of the secondintermediate section 64 i. The 71 i limits the application of undesired pressure on the interdental gingival when the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 h is positioned between a patient's teeth. Also, thefirst end portion 51 i has aflat bottom surface 76 i, and thesecond end portion 52 i has aflat bottom surface 77 i. - Referring now to
FIGS. 4-8 , the placement of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 is shown during a method according to the invention for the restoration of a tooth. After thedental matrix 30 is positioned as shown inFIG. 4 , the dentist stretches thedental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 . Thedental matrix stabilizer 48 can be stretched by inserting the ends of a pliers in thefirst throughhole 58 and thesecond throughhole 59 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 and opening the ends of the pliers. Alternatively, the dentist can grab and pull apart theend portions dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 . The stretching of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 leads to a thinning of themiddle portion 53 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 such that thedental matrix stabilizer 48 can be inserted betweenteeth FIG. 4 . Thedental matrix stabilizer 48 then biases thebase portion 42 of thedental matrix 30 against thetooth 12 as shown inFIG. 5 . - After the
dental matrix stabilizer 48 is placed against thebase portion 42 of thedental matrix 30, the dentist separates thefirst end portion 51 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 intoseparate end members area 61 of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48. Likewise, the dentist separates thesecond end portion 52 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 intoseparate end members area 65 of material weakness of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48. The dentist then flexes theseparator ring 78 open and then places theends 79 of theseparator ring 78 between theseparate end members separate end members dental matrix stabilizer 48 as shown inFIGS. 6 and 7 . As shown inFIG. 7 , theend member 63 biases thebase portion 42 of thedental matrix 30 against thetooth 12 and theend member 64 contacts the base of thetooth 24. In a similar manner, theend member 67 biases thebase portion 42 of thedental matrix 30 against thetooth 12 and theend member 68 contacts the base of thetooth 24. Optionally, two separator rings can be used with one separator ring applying adaptation pressure on thedental matrix 30 and the other separator ring applying adaptation pressure on the dental matrix stabilizer. - The
dental matrix stabilizers dental matrix stabilizer 48B ofFIG. 15 as the dentist can grab and pull apart theend portions dental matrix stabilizer 48B in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 when placingdental matrix stabilizer 48B. Also, the areas ofmaterial weakness dental matrix stabilizers dental matrix stabilizers dental matrix stabilizers FIG. 9 . - Looking at
FIG. 8 , alternative ends 79A, 79A2, 79B, are shown on aseparator ring 78A having anelastic ring 79C. The ends 79A, 79A2, 79B, ofseparator ring 78A are spaced apart such thatend 79B can be placed between theseparate end members dental matrix stabilizer 48 and theend 79A can bias theupper portion 44 of thedental matrix 30 and the end 79A2 can bias thetooth 24 when theseparator ring 78A is placed on thedental matrix stabilizer 48. Preferably, the ends 79A, 79A2, 79B ofseparator ring 78A are formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) material to provide for passage of light from thedental curing light 80. Theelastic ring 79C of theseparator ring 78A can be opaque or translucent. Suitable materials for theends 79A, 79A2, 79B of theseparator ring 78A are elastic polymeric materials and suitable materials for thering 79C of theseparator ring 78A are polymeric, metallic or composite materials. In one embodiment, the ends 79A, 79A2, 79B ofseparator ring 78A have arecess 79D that accepts aprotrusion 79E of theelastic ring 79C in an interference fit such that the ends 79A, 79A2, 79B ofseparator ring 78A are removable from theelastic ring 79C. While the ends 79A, 79A2, 79B of theseparator ring 78A are shown having a generally J-shaped or L-shaped configuration inFIG. 8 , the ends 79A, 79A2, 79B can also have a V-shaped configuration, or any other spaced apart configuration that allows for the application of force to end members of thedental matrix stabilizers upper portion 44 of thedental matrix 30 when theseparator ring 78A is placed on the dental matrix stabilizer. - An example
dental curing light 80 used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Looking atFIG. 12 , there is shown adental curing light 80 according to the invention. Thedental curing light 80 includes an electrical power supply (not shown) and a light source (not shown) in electrical communication with the electrical power supply. The light source can be a high intensity light emitting diode as is known in the art. Thedental curing light 80 uses the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials. Single wavelength devices are preferred. Thedental curing light 80 includes a light guide including aproximal section 82, a firstdistal section 84 extending from theproximal section 84, and a seconddistal section 86 extending from theproximal section 82. Theproximal section 82 is in optical communication with the light source, the firstdistal section 84 and the seconddistal section 86. The firstdistal section 84 has a firstdistal end 85, and the seconddistal section 86 has a seconddistal end 87. The firstdistal section 84 and the seconddistal section 86 are formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the firstdistal section 84 and the seconddistal section 86 can be bent to emit light in a various selected directions. An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane. - The
dental curing light 80 further includes afirst light tip 91 having afirst base 92 removably connected to the firstdistal end 85 of the firstdistal section 84 of the light guide. Thefirst light tip 91 includes a first hollow tubularopaque body 93 having afirst aperture 94 for emitting light. Thefirst body 93 is formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the firsthollow body 93 can be bent to emit light in a first selected direction from thefirst aperture 94. An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane. The outside diameter of thefirst light tip 91 tapers inward from thefirst base 92 toward thefirst aperture 94. In one embodiment, thefirst light tip 91 has arecess 105 that accepts aprotrusion 106 of the firstdistal end 85 of the firstdistal section 84 of the light guide in an interference fit such that thefirst light tip 91 is removable from the firstdistal end 85 of the firstdistal section 84 of the light guide. - The
dental curing light 80 also includes a secondlight tip 96 having asecond base 97 removably connected to the seconddistal end 87 of the seconddistal section 86 of the light guide. The secondlight tip 96 includes a second hollow tubularopaque body 98 having asecond aperture 99 for emitting light. Thesecond body 98 is formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the secondhollow body 98 can be bent to emit light in a second selected direction from thesecond aperture 99. An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane. The outside diameter of the secondlight tip 96 tapers inward from thesecond base 97 toward thesecond aperture 99. In one embodiment, the secondlight tip 96 has arecess 115 that accepts aprotrusion 116 of the seconddistal end 87 of the seconddistal section 86 of the light guide in an interference fit such that the secondlight tip 96 is removable from seconddistal end 87 of the seconddistal section 86 of the light guide. - In the
dental curing light 80, the electrical power supply, the light source and theproximal section 82 of the light guide can be encased in ahousing 101. Alternatively, the electrical power supply and the light source are encased in thehousing 101 and theproximal section 82 of the light guide is at least partially outside thehousing 101. - The
dental curing light 80 can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth. In the method, a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation, and light is directed from thefirst light tip 91 of thedental curing light 80 at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation. Simultaneously lights is directed from the secondlight tip 96 of thedental curing light 80 at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation. Thefirst light tip 91 and the secondlight tip 96 can be bent such that light can be directed at the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation. The use of light curing is generally preferred over chemical curing as the resulting cured material is color stable. - Turning now to
FIG. 12A , another example dental curing light 380 that may be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Thedental curing light 380 includes an electrical power supply 381 (such as an AC power supply or a rechargeable battery or a primary battery) andlight sources electrical power supply 381. Theelectrical power supply 381 and thelight sources housing 401. Thelight sources dental curing light 380 can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials. Plasma arc, halogen, and laser light sources are also suitable. - The
dental curing light 380 includes afirst light guide 383 a having a firstdistal section 384 a and a firstdistal end 385 a. A first light conducting optical fiber bundle (not shown, similar to 386 b) is contained within a first sleeve of thefirst light guide 383 a. The first light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from thelight source 382 a to a transparent or translucentfirst tip 388 a of thefirst light guide 383 a. Thefirst tip 388 a of thefirst light guide 383 a can have a 3 millimeter circle diameter and can extend axially about 3 millimeters beyond thesleeve 387 a of thefirst light guide 383 a. - The
dental curing light 380 also includes a secondlight guide 383 b having a seconddistal section 384 b and a seconddistal end 385 b. A second circular light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 b (see FIG. 12AA) is contained within asecond sleeve 387 b of the secondlight guide 383 b. The second light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 b conducts light from thelight source 382 b to a transparent or translucentsecond tip 388 b of the secondlight guide 383 b. Thesecond tip 388 b of the secondlight guide 383 b can have a 3 millimeter circle diameter and can extend about 3 millimeters beyond thesleeve 387 b of the secondlight guide 383 b. Thesecond tip 388 b extends outward from an integral transparent or translucent disc-like flange 388 t. The second light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 b also conducts light from thelight source 382 b to the disc-like flange 388 t. - In one version of the
dental curing light 380, thefirst sleeve 387 a and thesecond sleeve 387 b are formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that thefirst sleeve 387 a and thesecond sleeve 387 b can be bent to emit light in a various selected directions. An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane. - In another version of the
dental curing light 380, thefirst sleeve 387 a and thesecond sleeve 387 b are formed from a rigid material. Looking atFIG. 12B , the operation of such adental curing light 380 is shown. Thelight source 382 a and firstlight guide 383 a are mounted on a hinge assembly such that thelight source 382 a and firstlight guide 383 a may pivot in direction O1 shown inFIG. 12B . Likewise, thelight source 382 b and secondlight guide 383 b are mounted on a hinge assembly such that thelight source 382 b and secondlight guide 383 b may pivot in direction O2 shown inFIG. 12B . The hinge assemblies are spring-biased inward such that the rest position for thefirst light guide 383 a and the secondlight guide 383 b are depicted in full lines inFIG. 12B . When thefirst light guide 383 a and the secondlight guide 383 b are flexed outward against the bias of the hinge assemblies, thefirst light guide 383 a and the second light guide 383 are in the flexed positions depicted in dashed lines inFIG. 12B . - The
dental curing light 380 can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth. In the method, a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation. Thefirst light guide 383 a and the secondlight guide 383 b can be flexed outward as described with reference toFIG. 12B , and thereafter thefirst light guide 383 a and the secondlight guide 383 b are released such that thefirst tip 388 a of thedental curing light 380 assumes a position near a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation and thesecond tip 388 b of thedental curing light 380 assumes a position near a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation. Alternatively, when thefirst sleeve 387 a and thesecond sleeve 387 b comprise flexible materials, thefirst sleeve 387 a and thesecond sleeve 387 b can be bent such that light can be directed at the buccal portion and the lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation by thefirst tip 388 a and thesecond tip 388 b, preferably at a distance of less than 6 millimeters, most preferably at 3-4 millimeters. The proximity of the light guides or LEDs can be important as moving as little as 3 millimeters away from the surface affects photon transfer. The hinging of the light guides along with the dual surface profiles of the tips allows more intimate positioning than with previous lights. Preferably, in the relaxed position, thefirst tip 388 a and thesecond tip 388 b are about 4 to about 15 millimeters apart. In the case of incisor restoration, thefirst tip 388 a and thesecond tip 388 b are most preferably about 4 to about 15 millimeters apart. In the case of molar restoration, thefirst tip 388 a and thesecond tip 388 b are most preferably about 4 to about 15 millimeters apart. - Turning now to
FIG. 12C , another example dental curing light 380 c that may be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Thedental curing light 380 c includes anelectrical power supply 381 c (such as batteries) andlight sources lines electrical power supply 381 c. Thelight sources dental curing light 380 c can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials. Theelectrical power supply 381 c is contained in ahousing 401 c. Thedental curing light 380 c includes afirst light guide 383 c having a firstdistal section 384 c and a firstdistal end 385 c. Thedental curing light 380 c also includes a secondlight guide 383 d having a seconddistal section 384 d and a seconddistal end 385 d. Thelight source 382 c is contained in the firstdistal end 385 c of thefirst light guide 383 c. Likewise, thelight source 382 d is contained in the seconddistal end 385 d of the secondlight guide 383 d. - A first light conducting
optical fiber bundle 386 c conducts light from thelight source 382 c to afirst tip 388 c which can extend about 3 millimeters beyond the sleeve 387 c of thefirst light guide 383 c. Likewise, a second light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 d conducts light from thelight source 382 d to asecond tip 388 d which can extend about 3 millimeters beyond the second sleeve 387 d of the secondlight guide 383 d. Alternatively, the first light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 c and the second light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 d may be omitted from thedental curing light 380 c and light may be emitted from thelight sources tips light sources - Turning now to
FIG. 12D , another example dental curing light 380 d that may be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Thedental curing light 380 d includes an electrical power supply (not shown) and light sources (not shown) in electrical communication with the electrical power supply as in thedental curing light 380 ofFIG. 12A . Thedental curing light 380 d includes afirst light guide 383 e having a firstdistal section 384 e and a firstdistal end 385 e. Thedental curing light 380 d also includes a secondlight guide 383 f having a seconddistal section 384 f and a seconddistal end 385 f. A first light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source to afirst tip 388 e of the first light conducting optical fiber. Likewise, a second light conducting optical fiber conducts light from the light source to asecond tip 388 f of the second light conducting optical fiber. In thedental curing light 380 d, there is afan 391 d that is in fluid communication with a firstfluid conduit 392 e and a secondfluid conduit 392 f. The fan is powered by the electrical power supply. Flowing air from thefan 391 d passes through the firstfluid conduit 392 e and exits the firstdistal end 385 e of thefirst light guide 383 e. Flowing air from thefan 391 d also passes through the secondfluid conduit 392 f and exits the seconddistal end 385 f of the secondlight guide 383 f. When using thedental curing light 380 d to cure restorative material in a cavity preparation, the flowing air contacts the tooth to provide a cooling effect. This eliminates heating of the tooth that results from photon collisions with the tooth. - Turning now to
FIGS. 12E and 12F , another example dental curing light 380 e that may be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Thedental curing light 380 e includes an electrical power supply (not shown) and light sources (not shown) in electrical communication with the electrical power supply as in thedental curing light 380 ofFIG. 12A . Thedental curing light 380 e includes afirst light guide 383 g having a firstdistal section 384 g and a firstdistal end 385 g. Thedental curing light 380 e also includes a secondlight guide 383 h having a seconddistal section 384 h and a seconddistal end 385 h. In the dental curing light 380 e, there is also a thirdlight guide 383 j having a thirddistal section 384 j and a thirddistal end 385 j. A first light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source to afirst tip 388 g of the first light conducting optical fiber. Likewise, a second light conducting optical fiber bundle conducts light from the light source to asecond tip 388 h of the second light conducting optical fiber. Likewise, a third light conducting optical fiber conducts light from the light source to anend 388 j of the third light conducting optical fiber. Thefirst light guide 383 g and the secondlight guide 383 h are used to cure buccal and lingual portions of the restorative material as described above with reference toFIG. 12A . The thirdlight guide 383 j is used to cure occlusal portions of the restorative material. - Turning now to
FIG. 12G , yet another example dental curing light 380 g that may be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. The dental curing light 380 g includes anelectrical power supply 381 g (such as batteries) andlight sources lines 381 q. 381 r with theelectrical power supply 381 g. Thelight sources electrical power supply 381 g is contained in ahousing 401 g. Thedental curing light 380 c includes a first generally L-shapedlight guide 383 q having a firstdistal section 384 q and a firstdistal end 385 q. Thedental curing light 380 c also includes a second generally L-shapedlight guide 383 r having a seconddistal section 384 r and a seconddistal end 385 r. Thelight source 382 g is contained in the firstdistal end 385 q of thefirst light guide 383 q. Likewise, thelight source 382 h is contained in the seconddistal end 385 r of the secondlight guide 383 r. - A first light conducting
optical fiber bundle 386 q conducts light from thelight source 382 g to afirst tip 388 q. Thefirst tip 388 q extends about 3 millimeters beyond thesleeve 387 q of thefirst light guide 383 q. Likewise, a second light conductingoptical fiber 386 r conducts light from thelight source 382 h to asecond tip 388 r. Thesecond tip 388 r of extends about 3 millimeters beyond thesecond sleeve 387 r of the secondlight guide 383 r. Alternatively, the first light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 q and the second light conductingoptical fiber bundle 386 r may be omitted from the dental curing light 380 g and light may be emitted from the light sources 382 q, 382 r to thetips - In the dental curing light 380 g, the
first light guide 383 q and the secondlight guide 383 r are mounted on ahinge assembly 395 g such that thefirst light guide 383 q may pivot in direction O3 shown inFIG. 12G and the secondlight guide 383 r may pivot in direction O4 shown inFIG. 12G . Thehinge assembly 395 g includes acentral pivot pin 397 g in the middle of a helical torsion spring that has afirst leg 398 g that biases thefirst light guide 383 g in direction O5 and asecond leg 399 g that biases the secondlight guide 383 r in direction O6 as shown inFIG. 12G . - The dental curing light 380 g can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth. In the method, a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation. The
first light guide 383 q and the secondlight guide 383 r can be flexed outward in directions O3 and O4 respectively as described with reference toFIG. 12G and thereafter thefirst light guide 383 q and the secondlight guide 383 g are released such that thefirst tip 388 q of the dental curing light 380 g assumes a position near a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 6 millimeters, most preferably at 3-4 millimeters) and thesecond tip 388 r of the dental curing light 380 g assumes a position near a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 6 millimeters, most preferably at 3-4 millimeters). - Turning now to
FIG. 12H , another example dental curing light 380 h that may be used in the method of the invention will be now be described in further detail. Thedental curing light 380 h includes anelectrical power supply 381 h (such as batteries) andlight sources line 381 x with theelectrical power supply 381 h. Thelight sources dental curing light 380 h can use the typical 400-500 nanometer wavelength that is used in curing light curable composite materials. Theelectrical power supply 381 h is contained in ahousing 401 h. Thedental curing light 380 h includes antubular extension arm 383 h having adistal section 384 h and adistal end 385 h. At thedistal end 385 h of theextension arm 383 h, there is located an arch-shapedsupport 387 h on whichlight sources FIGS. 12H and 12I , the included angle A between thedistal section 384 h and thedistal end 385 h is about 90 degrees; however, the included angle between thedistal section 384 h and thedistal end 385 h can be about 30 degrees to about 150 degrees, preferably about 60 degrees to about 120 degrees. In the side view ofFIG. 12H , the arch-shapedsupport 387 h has a generally U-shaped perimeter; however, other perimeter shapes, such as square, rectangular, V-shaped, oval, or circular, can be used. Thesupport 387 h has a base wall 388 x, a first wall 389 x extending from the base wall 388 x, and a spaced second wall 390 x extending from the base wall 388 x. The base wall 388 x is connected to thearm 383 h. The arch-shapedsupport 387 h can be rigid, or can be formed from a flexible material that retains its shape upon deforming. An example flexible material is one that includes deformable metal wires that retain their shape upon bending in a matrix of an elastomer such as silicone or polyurethane. - The
dental curing light 380 h can be used in a method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth. In the method, a light-curable restorative material is placed in the cavity preparation. Thedental curing light 380 h is positioned such that thelight source 382 s assumes a position near a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 9 millimeters), thelight source 382 t assumes a position near an occlusal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 9 millimeters), and thelight source 382 u assumes a position near a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation (preferably at a distance of less than 9 millimeters). - Turning to
FIGS. 16-18 , there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomicdental matrix 130 which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously. In thedental matrix 130, there is afirst strip 132 having aconcave side surface 140 and aconvex side surface 138 at planes horizontal to thefirst strip 132. Thefirst strip 132 of thedental matrix 130 also has abase portion 142 and anupper portion 144 integral with and extending upward from thebase portion 142 of thefirst strip 132. The horizontallyconcave side surface 140 forming thebase portion 142 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of thebase portion 142 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 146 of the first strip 132 (seeFIG. 17 ). The horizontallyconcave side surface 140 forming theupper portion 144 of thefirst strip 132 is vertically concave (seeFIG. 17 ). - In the
dental matrix 130, there is also asecond strip 152 having aconcave side surface 158 and aconvex side surface 160 at planes horizontal to thesecond strip 152. Thesecond strip 152 of thedental matrix 130 also has abase portion 162 and anupper portion 164 integral with and extending upward from thebase portion 162 of thesecond strip 152. The horizontallyconcave side surface 158 forming thebase portion 162 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of thebase portion 162 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 166 of the second strip 152 (seeFIG. 17 ). The horizontallyconcave side surface 158 forming theupper portion 164 of thesecond strip 152 is vertically concave (seeFIG. 17 ). - The
first strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 are joined by fusing at amiddle portion 172 of thedental matrix 130 at theupper portion 144 of thefirst strip 132 and theupper portion 164 of thesecond strip 152. The dashed oval inFIG. 16 shows an example area of fusion. Thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 can be formed as separate pieces and fused together or molded as a single piece. Preferably, thedental matrix 130 is formed from a translucent (preferably transparent) material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. Alternatively, thedental matrix 130 can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum. Thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 can be formed using the same or different materials. - Looking at
FIG. 18 , the ends of thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 have a material thickness Ta (which may be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment). Moving toward themiddle portion 172 of thedental matrix 130, the thickness of thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 tapers to a thickness Tb measured from theconcave side surface 140 of thefirst strip 132 to theconcave side surface 158 of thesecond strip 152. Preferably, the thickness Tb is less than two times the thickness Ta such that thedental matrix 130 can be more easily positioned between restoration of two approximating teeth. Most preferably, the thickness Tb equals the thickness Ta. - For example, in one form of the
dental matrix 130, Ta can be about 0.002 inches and Tb can be about 0.002 inches. In other words, the contact area of thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 that is common to thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 will be the thickness of one sheet of strip (about 0.002 inches). This will mitigate the serious problem of back to back matrices that, when the matrices are removed, an open contact is created of 0.004 inches or more. In another form of thedental matrix 130, Ta can be about 0.002 inches and Tb can be about 0.001 inches. In other words, the contact area that is common to thefirst strip 132 and thesecond strip 152 will be less than the thickness of one strip, or less than 0.002 inches. In this case, only a minimal separation pressure will be needed. One non-limiting advantage of the thinner section where the two wings of the matrix join (or are shared) is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously. The space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs. - When using the
dental matrix 130 to restore two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously, the placement of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 between approximating teeth occurs before thedental matrix 130 is inserted between the approximating teeth. The dentist stretches thedental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 . Thedental matrix stabilizer 48 can be stretched by inserting the ends of a pliers in thefirst throughhole 58 and thesecond throughhole 59 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 and opening the ends of the pliers. Alternatively, the dentist can grab and pull apart theend portions dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 . The stretching of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 leads to a decrease in vertical cross-section of themiddle portion 53 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 such that thedental matrix stabilizer 48 can be inserted between approximatingteeth FIG. 4 . Thedental matrix 130 can then be placed between approximatingteeth dental matrix stabilizer 48 is released. As a result, thedental matrix stabilizer 48 biases thebase portion 142 of thedental matrix 130 against thetooth 12 and thedental matrix stabilizer 48 biases thebase portion 162 of thedental matrix 130 against thetooth 24. In one example, thematrix 130 is positioned in a four handed operation in which the doublesided matrix 130 is inserted by one person as the other clinical person stretches thestabilizer 48 to allow the doublesided matrix 130 to seat, then thestabilizer 48 is released and relaxes into proper position. Alternatively, one or two clear stabilizing wedges can be inserted after thematrix 130 is placed. - Turning to
FIGS. 19-21 , there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomicdental matrix 230 which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously. In thedental matrix 230, there is afirst strip 232 having aconcave side surface 240 and aconvex side surface 238 at planes horizontal to thefirst strip 232. Thefirst strip 232 of thedental matrix 230 also has abase portion 242 and anupper portion 244 integral with and extending upward from thebase portion 242 of thefirst strip 232. The horizontallyconcave side surface 240 forming thebase portion 242 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of thebase portion 242 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 246 of the first strip 232 (seeFIG. 20 ). The horizontallyconcave side surface 240 forming theupper portion 244 of thefirst strip 232 is vertically concave (seeFIG. 20 ). - In the
dental matrix 230, there is also asecond strip 252 having aconcave side surface 258 and aconvex side surface 260 at planes horizontal to thesecond strip 252. Thesecond strip 252 of thedental matrix 230 also has abase portion 262 and anupper portion 264 integral with and extending upward from thebase portion 262 of thesecond strip 252. The horizontallyconcave side surface 258 forming thebase portion 262 is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of thebase portion 262 has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface 266 of the second strip 252 (seeFIG. 20 ). The horizontallyconcave side surface 258 forming theupper portion 264 of thesecond strip 252 is vertically concave (seeFIG. 20 ). - The
first strip 232 and thesecond strip 252 are joined by fusing at amiddle portion 272 of thedental matrix 230 at theupper portion 244 of thefirst strip 232 and theupper portion 264 of thesecond strip 252. Thefirst strip 232 and thesecond strip 252 can be formed as separate pieces and fused together or molded as a single piece. Thedental matrix 230 also includes anoval throughhole 290 that in one example can be a 2×3 millimeter oval. Other shapes are also possible for thethroughhole 290. Preferably, thedental matrix 230 is formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. Alternatively, thedental matrix 230 can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum. - Looking at
FIG. 21 , the ends of thefirst strip 232 and thesecond strip 252 have a material thickness Ta (which can be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment). Moving toward themiddle portion 272 of thedental matrix 230, the thickness of thefirst strip 232 and thesecond strip 252 tapers to a thickness Tb measured from theconcave side surface 240 of thefirst strip 232 to theconcave side surface 258 of thesecond strip 252. Preferably, the thickness Tb is less than two times the thickness Ta such that thedental matrix 230 can be more easily positioned between restoration of two approximating teeth. Most preferably, the thickness Tb equals the thickness Ta. One non-limiting advantage of the thinner section where the two wings of the matrix join is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously. The space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs. - When using the
dental matrix 230 to restore two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously, the placement of the interproximaldental matrix stabilizer 48 between approximating teeth occurs before thedental matrix 230 is inserted between the approximating teeth. The dentist stretches thedental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 . Thedental matrix stabilizer 48 can be stretched by inserting the ends of a pliers in thefirst throughhole 58 and thesecond throughhole 59 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 and opening the ends of the pliers. Alternatively, the dentist can grab and pull apart theend portions dental matrix stabilizer 48 in directions A and B shown inFIG. 4 . The stretching of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 leads to a thinning of themiddle portion 53 of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 such that thedental matrix stabilizer 48 can be inserted between approximatingteeth FIG. 4 . Thedental matrix 230 can then be placed between approximatingteeth dental matrix stabilizer 48 is released. As a result, thedental matrix stabilizer 48 biases thebase portion 242 of thedental matrix 230 against thetooth 12 and thedental matrix stabilizer 48 biases thebase portion 262 of thedental matrix 230 against thetooth 24. - When using the
dental matrix 230 to restore two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously, thethroughhole 290 will allow restorative material from both cavity preparations to unite. By applying a gentle force at the end of the procedure, the approximating teeth will separate along the cleavage plane. Alternatively, thedental matrix 230 can be cutaway, and the patient can be dismissed and the teeth will thereafter cleave (snap apart) with normal mastication to form a tight contact. This will assure that a strong tight tooth to tooth contact is created. Special offset shears can be used to cutaway thematrix 230 that would otherwise be locked onto teeth. Alternatively, a perforation can be created on the lingual side that will allow for easy removal of thedental matrix 230. - Turning to
FIG. 22 , there is shown still another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomicdental matrix 230A which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously. In thedental matrix 230A, there is afirst strip 232A having aconcave side surface 240A and aconvex side surface 238A at planes horizontal to thefirst strip 232A. Thefirst strip 232A of thedental matrix 230A also has a base portion (not shown, similar to 242 inFIG. 20 ) and anupper portion 244A integral with and extending upward from the base portion of thefirst strip 232A. The horizontallyconcave side surface 240A forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of thefirst strip 232A. The horizontallyconcave side surface 240A forming theupper portion 244A of thefirst strip 232A is vertically concave. - In the
dental matrix 230A, there is also asecond strip 252A having aconcave side surface 258A and aconvex side surface 260A at planes horizontal to thesecond strip 252A. Thesecond strip 252A of thedental matrix 230A also has a base portion (not shown, similar to 262 inFIG. 20 ) and anupper portion 264A integral with and extending upward from the base portion of thesecond strip 252A. The horizontallyconcave side surface 258A forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of thesecond strip 252A. The horizontallyconcave side surface 258A forming theupper portion 264A of thesecond strip 252A is vertically concave. - The
first strip 232A and thesecond strip 252A are joined by fusing at amiddle portion 272A of thedental matrix 230A at theupper portion 244A of thefirst strip 232A and theupper portion 264A of thesecond strip 252A. Thefirst strip 232A includes an oval throughhole 289A that in one example can be a 2×3 millimeter oval. Thesecond strip 252A includes anoval throughhole 290A that in one example can be a 2×3 millimeter oval. The oval throughhole 289A and theoval throughhole 290A are aligned when thefirst strip 232A and thesecond strip 252A are joined by fusing. Other shapes are also possible for thethroughholes 289A and 290A. When thefirst strip 232A and thesecond strip 252A are joined by fusing, athin membrane 288A is positioned between the throughholes 289A and 290A and a portion of thefirst strip 232A and thesecond strip 252A. Preferably, thefirst strip 232A, thesecond strip 252A, and themembrane 288A are formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. Alternatively, thedental matrix 230A can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum. - Looking at
FIG. 22 , the ends of thefirst strip 232A and thesecond strip 252A have a material thickness Ta (which can be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment). Moving toward themiddle portion 272A of thedental matrix 230A, the thickness of thefirst strip 232A and thesecond strip 252A tapers to a thickness Tb measured from theconcave side surface 240A of thefirst strip 232A to theconcave side surface 258A of thesecond strip 252A. Preferably, the thickness Tb is less than two times the thickness Ta such that thedental matrix 230A can be more easily positioned between restoration of two approximating teeth. Most preferably, the thickness Tb equals the thickness Ta. One non-limiting advantage of the thinner section where the two wings of the matrix join is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously. The space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs. - Turning to
FIGS. 23-24 , there is shown yet another embodiment of a sectional translucent (preferably transparent) anatomicdental matrix 230B which allows for the restoration of two approximating teeth simultaneously. In thedental matrix 230B, there is afirst strip 232B having aconcave side surface 240B and aconvex side surface 238B at planes horizontal to thefirst strip 232B. Thefirst strip 232B of thedental matrix 230B also has a base portion (not shown, similar to 262B) and anupper portion 244B integral with and extending upward from the base portion of thefirst strip 232B. The horizontallyconcave side surface 240B forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of thefirst strip 232B. The horizontallyconcave side surface 240B forming theupper portion 244B of thefirst strip 232B is vertically concave. - In the
dental matrix 230B, there is also asecond strip 252B having aconcave side surface 258B and aconvex side surface 260B at planes horizontal to thesecond strip 252B. Thesecond strip 252B of thedental matrix 230B also has abase portion 262B and anupper portion 264B integral with and extending upward from the base portion of thesecond strip 252B. The horizontallyconcave side surface 258B forming the base portion is not vertically concave, that is, a cross-section of the base portion has parallel straight vertical walls that are normal to a bottom surface of thesecond strip 252B. The horizontallyconcave side surface 258B forming theupper portion 264B of thesecond strip 252B is vertically concave. Preferably, thefirst strip 232B and thesecond strip 252B are formed from a translucent material such as a polymeric film. One non-limiting example translucent material is the polyester film commercially available as Mylar™. Alternatively, thedental matrix 230B can be formed from a metallic material such as stainless steel or aluminum. - The
second strip 252B includes anoval throughhole 290B that in one example can be about 2×3 millimeter oval. Other shapes are also possible for thethroughhole 290B. When thefirst strip 232B and thesecond strip 252B are placed back to back, a section of thefirst strip 232B is positioned in the throughhole 290B of thesecond strip 252B. Looking atFIG. 24 , the ends of thefirst strip 232B and thesecond strip 252B have a material thickness Ta (which can be about 0.002-0.003 inches in an example embodiment). When thefirst strip 232B and thesecond strip 252B are placed back to back, the thickness of thedental matrix 230B within the perimeter of the throughhole 290B will be the thickness of thefirst strip 232B, i.e., a single material thickness. One non-limiting advantage of the single material thickness within the perimeter of the throughhole 290B is to avoid the gapping that occurs when two matrix bands are placed back to back when restoring two decayed, approximating teeth simultaneously. The space taken by two thicknesses of a matrix dramatically increases the likelihood of an “open contact” where food becomes impacted and periodontal inflammation occurs. However, in thedental matrix 230B only a single material thickness within the perimeter of the throughhole 290B is present. - Referring now to
FIGS. 25 to 28 , there is shown the use of anotheralternative separator ring 410 according to the invention. Theseparator ring 410 has anarcuate body 412 havinglegs body 412.Leg 414 has a disc-shapedend 415, andleg 416 has a disc-shapedend 417. In the relaxed position shown inFIGS. 26 and 27 , there is a space between thelegs - The
separator ring 410 has aclamp 420 mounted on the end of theleg 414, and aclamp 422 mounted on the end of theleg 416. Theclamp 420 has an inwardly directedouter surface 424 that slopes upward and outward fromside walls clamp 420 and reaches aridge 432. Likewise, theclamp 422 has an inwardly directedouter surface 434 that slopes upward and outward fromside walls clamp 420 and reaches aridge 439. Looking atFIG. 28 , the bottom of theclamp 422 has an upwardly directedconcavity 444. The bottom of theclamp 420 has a similar upwardly directed concavity (not shown). The upwardly directedconcavity 444 allows the placement of a stabilizer with ends that do not separate (such asstabilizers concavity 444. Theseparator ring 410 also has anarcuate cover 456. Theclamps cover 456 are preferably formed from a translucent elastomeric material such as a silicone or polyurethane elastomer. - Looking at
FIG. 25 , theclamp 422 of theseparator ring 410 can be placed between theseparate end members dental matrix stabilizer 48 with theridge 439 directed inward toward thestabilizer 48 when theseparator ring 410 is placed on thedental matrix stabilizer 48. Theclamp 420 of theseparator ring 410 can also be placed between the opposite side end members of thedental matrix stabilizer 48 in a similar fashion. The translucent (preferably transparent) elastomeric material of theclamps tooth 12. - Referring now to
FIGS. 29-31 , there is shown a top view of three adjacent teeth having three different cavity preparations. Intooth 510 ofFIGS. 29 and 30 , there is shown a conventional proximal box-shaped “slot”cavity preparation 515. Intooth 520 ofFIG. 29 , there is shown a conventional mesio-occlusal cavity preparation 522 having a first box shapedmesial section 523, a secondintermediate section 524, and aninner extension 525. Typically, the distance from the occlusal to the floor of themesial section 523 is greater than the distance from the occlusal to the floor of theintermediate section 524 which is greater than the distance from the occlusal to the floor of theinner extension 525. Often, theinner extension 525 may be described as having a dovetail shape. - Referring to
FIGS. 29 and 31 , acavity preparation 532 according to the invention is shown intooth 530 having aninterproximal surface 531. In the occlusal view ofFIG. 29 , asurface 534 which will form the interface between the restorative material and the tooth has a serpentine outline 535 a from thecavity margin 536 to anintermediate point 538 of thecavity preparation 532. Likewise, thesurface 534 has aserpentine outline 535 b from thecavity margin 541 to theintermediate point 538 of thecavity preparation 532. Looking atFIG. 31 , thesurface 534 slopes in a curvilinear manner from occlusal to gingival. - Other variations of the
cavity preparation 532 can be prepared. Thehollow cavity preparation 532 can be saucer shaped from buccal view and occlusal view. No mechanical retention is necessarily present in the cavity form as all retention is based on enamel adhesion, augmented with dentin adhesion. All margins are therefore knife edge and disappearing in nature versus the abrupt margins of current cavity designs. In another variation all of the margins, occlusal, gingival, buccal and lingual may have serpentine outlines. These margins provide additional adhesion and an even more pronounced knife edge, more invisible and better sealed filling margins. - Thus, the invention provides improved methods, dental matrices, dental wedges, interdental matrix stabilizers, dental separator rings, dental curing light devices, and kits for the restoration of a decayed portion of a tooth In the method, the filling material can be a single load of filling material that is cured in a single curing step in contrast to previous methods in which multiple two millimeter sections of filling material must be separately loaded and cured in multiple loading/curing steps. As a result, the method of the invention avoids the seams that are present between multiple two millimeter sections of filling material in prior methods.
- Although the present invention has been described with reference to certain embodiments, one skilled in the art will appreciate that the present invention can be practiced by other than the described embodiments, which have been presented for purposes of illustration and not of limitation. Therefore, the scope of the appended claims should not be limited to the description of the embodiments contained herein.
Claims (19)
1. A dental curing light comprising:
an electrical power supply;
a first light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply;
a second light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply,
wherein the first light guide and the second light guide are connected to a housing, and
at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide are movable with respect to the housing.
2. The dental curing light of claim 1 wherein:
at least one of the first light guide and the second light guide is formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition.
3. The dental curing light of claim 1 wherein:
both the first light guide and the second light guide are formed from a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition.
4. The dental curing light of claim 1 wherein:
both the first light guide and the second light guide are movable with respect to the housing.
5. The dental curing light of claim 1 further comprising:
a third light guide in optical communication with at least one light source in electrical communication with the electrical power supply.
6. The dental curing light of claim 5 wherein:
the third light guide directs light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the first light guide.
7. The dental curing light of claim 1 wherein:
the electrical power supply and the light source are encased in a housing.
8. The dental curing light of claim 1 further comprising:
a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide; and
a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide,
wherein the first tip and the second tip are angled toward each other.
9. The dental curing light of claim 1 further comprising:
a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide,
a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide,
wherein the first light guide and the second light guide have a relaxed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a first distance apart, and
the first light guide and the second light guide have an outwardly flexed position in which the first distal tip and the second distal tip are a second distance apart, the second distance being greater than the first distance.
10. The dental curing light of claim 9 wherein:
the first distance is about 4 to about 15 millimeters.
11. The dental curing light of claim 1 further comprising:
a first light transmitting tip connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, the first tip including a first tip section having a diameter less than a diameter of the first distal end of the first light guide; and
a second light transmitting tip connected to a second distal end of the second light guide, the second tip including a second tip section having a diameter less than a diameter of the second distal end of the second light guide.
12. The dental curing light of claim 11 wherein:
the first tip includes a first light transmitting section extending laterally from a base of the first tip section, and
the second tip includes a second light transmitting section extending laterally from a base of the second tip section.
13. The dental curing light of claim 1 wherein:
at least one of a first distal end of the first light guide and a second distal end of the second light guide includes an opening in fluid communication with a source of flowing air.
14. The dental curing light of claim 1 further comprising:
a first light tip having a first base connected to a first distal end of the first light guide, the first light tip including a first hollow tubular opaque body having a first aperture for emitting light, the first body comprising a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the first hollow body can be bent to emit light in a first selected direction from the first aperture; and
a second light tip having a second base connected to a second distal end of the second light guide, the second light tip including a second hollow tubular opaque body having a second aperture for emitting light, the second body comprising a flexible material which retains shape in a bent condition such that the second hollow body can be bent to emit light in a second selected direction from the second aperture.
15. The dental curing light of claim 14 wherein:
an outside diameter of the first light tip tapers inward from the first base toward the first aperture.
16. The dental curing light of claim 14 wherein:
the first light tip is removably connected to the first distal end of the first distal section of the light guide.
17. A method for the restoration of a tooth having a hollow cavity preparation in an interproximal surface of the tooth, the method comprising:
(a) placing a light-curable restorative material in the cavity preparation;
(b) directing light from the first light guide of the dental curing light of claim 1 at a buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation; and
(c) simultaneously directing light from the second light guide of the dental curing light of claim 1 at a lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
18. The method of claim 17 wherein:
step (b) comprises bending the first light guide such that light can be directed at the buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation and thereafter directing light from the first light guide of the dental curing light of claim 1 at the buccal portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
19. The method of claim 18 wherein:
step (c) comprises bending the second light guide such that light can be directed at the lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation and thereafter directing light from the second light guide of the dental curing light of claim 1 at the lingual portion of the restorative material in the cavity preparation.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US13/600,384 US20120322026A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2012-08-31 | Dental Curing Lights and a Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation and Filling Technique |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US84433306P | 2006-09-13 | 2006-09-13 | |
US88729107P | 2007-01-30 | 2007-01-30 | |
US11/834,959 US8272868B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental curing lights and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
US13/600,384 US20120322026A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2012-08-31 | Dental Curing Lights and a Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation and Filling Technique |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/834,959 Division US8272868B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental curing lights and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20120322026A1 true US20120322026A1 (en) | 2012-12-20 |
Family
ID=39170147
Family Applications (9)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/834,959 Expired - Fee Related US8272868B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental curing lights and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
US11/834,993 Abandoned US20080064004A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental Kits And A Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation And Filling Technique |
US11/834,974 Abandoned US20080064009A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental Separator Rings And A Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation And Filling Technique |
US11/834,907 Active 2030-11-17 US9308058B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Devices and a seamless, single load, injection molded cavity preparation and filling technique |
US11/834,945 Abandoned US20080064003A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental Matrix Devices And A Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation And Filling Technique |
US11/834,934 Active US8047843B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Matrix stabilizer devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
US13/600,384 Abandoned US20120322026A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2012-08-31 | Dental Curing Lights and a Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation and Filling Technique |
US15/094,660 Expired - Fee Related US10405946B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2016-04-08 | Devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
US16/563,532 Active 2028-12-19 US11382717B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2019-09-06 | Devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filing technique |
Family Applications Before (6)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/834,959 Expired - Fee Related US8272868B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental curing lights and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
US11/834,993 Abandoned US20080064004A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental Kits And A Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation And Filling Technique |
US11/834,974 Abandoned US20080064009A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental Separator Rings And A Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation And Filling Technique |
US11/834,907 Active 2030-11-17 US9308058B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Devices and a seamless, single load, injection molded cavity preparation and filling technique |
US11/834,945 Abandoned US20080064003A1 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Dental Matrix Devices And A Seamless, Single Load Cavity Preparation And Filling Technique |
US11/834,934 Active US8047843B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2007-08-07 | Matrix stabilizer devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
Family Applications After (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/094,660 Expired - Fee Related US10405946B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2016-04-08 | Devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filling technique |
US16/563,532 Active 2028-12-19 US11382717B2 (en) | 2006-09-13 | 2019-09-06 | Devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filing technique |
Country Status (2)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (9) | US8272868B2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2008033925A2 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20130252199A1 (en) * | 2012-03-26 | 2013-09-26 | David J. Clark | Dental Separator Ring |
US20140051032A1 (en) * | 2011-10-18 | 2014-02-20 | Fly Cast Technologies, Inc. | Coating for a dental matrix band |
USD810293S1 (en) | 2017-01-20 | 2018-02-13 | Garrison Dental Solutions, Llc | Dental instrument |
US10159548B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-12-25 | Garrison Dental Solutions, L.L.C. | Dental curing light |
Families Citing this family (38)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8641419B2 (en) * | 2007-07-25 | 2014-02-04 | David J. Clark | Methods and devices for fixed dental restoration |
US8393897B2 (en) | 2007-11-07 | 2013-03-12 | David J. Clark | Methods and devices for diastema closure |
US20090191506A1 (en) * | 2008-01-29 | 2009-07-30 | Clark David J | Dental Composite Dispenser For Injection Molded Filling Techniques |
US8529258B2 (en) * | 2008-02-20 | 2013-09-10 | Garrison Dental Soultions | Dental implement for tooth restoration |
DE102008062869A1 (en) * | 2008-12-17 | 2010-07-01 | Horvath, Domonkos, Dr. med. dent | Interdental device |
US10299887B2 (en) * | 2009-04-23 | 2019-05-28 | Nanova, Inc. | Atmospheric non-thermal gas plasma method for dental surface treatment |
US20110171596A1 (en) | 2010-01-14 | 2011-07-14 | Clark David J | Dental Wedge |
CN103237521A (en) * | 2010-05-12 | 2013-08-07 | 迪斯卡斯牙科有限责任公司 | Dental light device with identification means |
US8834160B1 (en) | 2010-10-08 | 2014-09-16 | Marc Gottlieb | Dental wedge and former device |
US8647120B2 (en) | 2011-06-30 | 2014-02-11 | Bowater, Llc | Dental separator apparatus and method |
CN106691606A (en) * | 2012-01-13 | 2017-05-24 | 埃尔斯盖恩产品私人有限公司 | A dental wedge |
US20130344455A1 (en) * | 2012-06-06 | 2013-12-26 | Garrison Dental Solutions | Dental implements |
US9237938B2 (en) * | 2013-02-01 | 2016-01-19 | Clifford John Van Putten | Dental shaping strip |
US9089383B2 (en) * | 2013-02-01 | 2015-07-28 | Clifford John Van Putten | Dental shaping strip |
US8899979B2 (en) * | 2013-02-28 | 2014-12-02 | Garrison Dental Solutions | Matrix ring for tooth restoration |
CA2929558C (en) * | 2013-11-07 | 2021-06-29 | Dentsply International Inc. | Pled dental matrix system |
EP3125815A4 (en) | 2014-03-25 | 2018-03-07 | David J. Clark | Dental matrix and dental matrix system |
WO2015187927A1 (en) | 2014-06-04 | 2015-12-10 | Clark, David, J. | Dental wedge |
RU2678463C2 (en) | 2014-12-09 | 2019-01-29 | 3М Инновейтив Пропертиз Компани | Methods of forming a dental restoration material |
WO2016183360A1 (en) | 2015-05-12 | 2016-11-17 | Clark David J | Dental separator device |
US9775686B2 (en) | 2015-12-07 | 2017-10-03 | Beverly Agnew | Dental dam clamp |
JP6878436B2 (en) | 2015-12-17 | 2021-05-26 | スリーエム イノベイティブ プロパティズ カンパニー | Mold for dental restoration |
EP3389552B1 (en) | 2015-12-17 | 2021-09-22 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | One-piece dental restoration molds |
US11547530B2 (en) | 2016-07-26 | 2023-01-10 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dental restoration molds |
US11351010B2 (en) | 2016-10-06 | 2022-06-07 | Burton Dental Innovations, Llc | Dental wedges and matrix bands for use in direct composite restoration techniques |
JP6903748B2 (en) * | 2016-10-06 | 2021-07-14 | マシュー・バートンBurton, Matthew | Dental wedges and matrix bands for use in direct composite restoration techniques |
USD822213S1 (en) | 2017-06-13 | 2018-07-03 | Garrison Dental Solutions, Llc | Dental ring |
WO2019060436A1 (en) * | 2017-09-19 | 2019-03-28 | Clark David J | Methods and devices for closing a space between teeth |
EP3684290A1 (en) | 2017-09-19 | 2020-07-29 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dental restoration molds |
IT201800005690A1 (en) * | 2018-05-24 | 2019-11-24 | Dental matrix | |
CN109259873B (en) * | 2018-07-18 | 2021-01-05 | 北京大学口腔医学院 | Personalized occlusal surface transparent silicone rubber guide plate and preparation method thereof and method for assisting in filling of affected teeth |
US20210386515A1 (en) * | 2018-08-23 | 2021-12-16 | David J. Clark | Methods and Devices for Interproximal Dental Restoration |
WO2020058855A1 (en) | 2018-09-18 | 2020-03-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dental restoration molds |
US20200100880A1 (en) * | 2018-10-01 | 2020-04-02 | Jeffrey A. Scharf | Dental trauma kit |
KR101940661B1 (en) * | 2018-10-05 | 2019-04-10 | 부산대학교 산학협력단 | Tooth contour fixing member |
US11925526B2 (en) | 2019-12-23 | 2024-03-12 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Custom tools for bonding orthodontic appliances and methods of bonding orthodontic appliances |
EP4081163B1 (en) | 2019-12-23 | 2024-10-16 | Solventum Intellectual Properties Company | Custom tool for bonding orthodontic appliances, and methods of designing custom tools |
US20230404706A1 (en) * | 2022-06-20 | 2023-12-21 | Poonam CHOWDHURY | Butterfly-shaped dental matrix band |
Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4266547A (en) * | 1977-05-16 | 1981-05-12 | Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. | Laser knife |
US5201655A (en) * | 1988-12-21 | 1993-04-13 | Joshua Friedman | Optical light guide for controlling the irradiation of a dental restorative material |
US5470331A (en) * | 1990-01-22 | 1995-11-28 | S.L.T. Japan Co., Ltd. | Laser light irradiation apparatus for medical treatment |
US6208788B1 (en) * | 1998-07-29 | 2001-03-27 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Apparatus and methods for concentrating light through fiber optic funnels coupled to dental light guides |
US20020001202A1 (en) * | 1997-07-02 | 2002-01-03 | Williams Jeffrey B. | Light delivery systems and applications thereof |
US20060019220A1 (en) * | 2004-07-22 | 2006-01-26 | Ondine International Ltd. | Sonophotodynamic therapy for dental applications |
Family Cites Families (112)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US2090904A (en) * | 1935-04-10 | 1937-08-24 | Singer Emil | Dental matrix |
US2611182A (en) | 1949-12-27 | 1952-09-23 | Benjamin F Tofflemire | Anatomical contact-forming dental matrix band for anterior teeth |
US3108377A (en) * | 1960-07-25 | 1963-10-29 | Meyer Alvin | Matrix for interproximal anterior restorations |
US3842505A (en) * | 1973-02-20 | 1974-10-22 | W Eames | Pre-formed dental matrix band |
US3815243A (en) * | 1973-06-18 | 1974-06-11 | W Eames | Wedge for dental matrix bands |
US3890714A (en) * | 1973-11-29 | 1975-06-24 | Kenneth W Gores | Dental wedge |
US4024643A (en) * | 1975-08-25 | 1977-05-24 | Eisenberg Harry H | Dental matrix retainer |
US4259070A (en) * | 1979-11-26 | 1981-03-31 | Marvin M. Stark Research Foundation | Dental wedge system |
US4337041A (en) * | 1980-09-29 | 1982-06-29 | Harsany John D | Dental wedge |
US4536155A (en) | 1982-09-17 | 1985-08-20 | Ireland Edward J | Dental matrix band |
US4468199A (en) * | 1983-01-10 | 1984-08-28 | Weikel G | Dental wedge |
DE3323085A1 (en) * | 1983-06-27 | 1985-01-03 | Till Dr. 2162 Steinkirchen Ropers | TOOTH MATRIX |
CH662266A5 (en) | 1983-10-04 | 1987-09-30 | Weissenfluh Hans Dr Von | FILM-SHAPED DENTAL MATRICE. |
US4523909A (en) | 1984-03-06 | 1985-06-18 | Lazarus Harry J | Plastic dental matrix and method of manufacturing same |
US4601662A (en) * | 1984-08-14 | 1986-07-22 | Galler Jeffrey M | Method of restoring posterior teeth with interproximal decay, and kit of armamentarium therefor |
CH669514A5 (en) * | 1986-02-05 | 1989-03-31 | Polydent S A | Interdental wedge with transparent body - has head shaped to indicate length and has textured surface for use with light beam |
US4704087A (en) | 1986-04-07 | 1987-11-03 | Dragan William B | Retainerless matrix band |
US4781583A (en) | 1987-05-04 | 1988-11-01 | Lazarus Harry J | Adjustable plastic film matrix |
DE3840350C1 (en) * | 1988-11-30 | 1990-04-12 | Girrbach Dental Gmbh, 7530 Pforzheim, De | |
US5017140A (en) | 1989-05-15 | 1991-05-21 | Jay Ascher | Removable and disposable extension for a light guide of a dental curing light and its method of use |
US5114341A (en) | 1989-05-15 | 1992-05-19 | Kassel Larry I | Dental matrix |
US4997367A (en) * | 1989-05-15 | 1991-03-05 | Kassel Larry I | Dental matrix |
US5035615A (en) * | 1990-05-31 | 1991-07-30 | Franklin Din | Dental filling band and method of use |
US5104317A (en) * | 1990-09-06 | 1992-04-14 | The Hygenic Corporation | Elastomeric cord for retaining a dental dam, cord dispenser and related combinations and methods |
US5218070A (en) * | 1991-02-11 | 1993-06-08 | Dentsply G.M.B.H. | Dental/medical composition and use |
US5527181A (en) * | 1994-02-22 | 1996-06-18 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Shape-conforming dental wedges |
SE501576C2 (en) * | 1994-03-03 | 1995-03-13 | Lars Brorson | Matrix bands and matrix holders for front tooth matrix |
US5460525A (en) | 1994-03-07 | 1995-10-24 | Rashid; Paul L. | Dual matrix band retainer |
EP0678281A1 (en) * | 1994-03-23 | 1995-10-25 | Torsten Dr. Thiele | Device for assisting in dental restauration |
US5425635A (en) | 1994-06-16 | 1995-06-20 | Croll; Theodore P. | Matrix band segment and restoration procedure |
US5607302A (en) * | 1994-10-17 | 1997-03-04 | Garrison; John E. | Matrix retainer apparatus for dental restorations |
DE4444305A1 (en) * | 1994-12-13 | 1996-06-20 | Pavel Dr Kriz | Retainable interdental wedge |
US5807101A (en) | 1996-01-17 | 1998-09-15 | Scalzo; Josephine | Universal occlusal matrix |
DE29603270U1 (en) * | 1996-02-23 | 1996-09-26 | Grabosch, Reinhold, Dr., 88677 Markdorf | Interdental wedges |
DE19616183C2 (en) * | 1996-03-20 | 1999-05-12 | Ivoclar Ag | Functionalized and polymerizable polymer |
US5626476A (en) * | 1996-04-25 | 1997-05-06 | Champagne; Richard | Technique for repairing teeth |
US5622496A (en) | 1996-04-25 | 1997-04-22 | Champagne; Richard | Technique for repairing teeth |
US5788487A (en) * | 1996-07-08 | 1998-08-04 | Meyer; Alvin | Dental shim |
US5730592A (en) | 1996-07-08 | 1998-03-24 | Meyer; Alvin | Dental matrix for elongated tooth cavities has bottom apron for improved adaptation |
EP1014882B1 (en) * | 1997-08-27 | 2008-10-29 | John E. Garrison | Improved dental wedge for utilization in dental restoration |
US5975906A (en) * | 1997-09-16 | 1999-11-02 | Knutson; Eric J. | Soft polymer dental strip and process therefor |
DE59710733D1 (en) | 1997-10-27 | 2003-10-16 | Geno Know How Sarnen Ag | Device for fixing and adapting a matrix for dental treatment |
US5997302A (en) | 1997-11-26 | 1999-12-07 | Jeneric Pentron Incorporated | Method for the formation of dental restorations from condensable composites |
US6220858B1 (en) * | 1997-12-02 | 2001-04-24 | Mercor Dental Products Inc. | Apparatus for placement of dental fillings |
US6162055A (en) | 1998-02-13 | 2000-12-19 | Britesmile, Inc. | Light activated tooth whitening composition and method of using same |
US6079978A (en) * | 1998-04-08 | 2000-06-27 | Ivoclar Ag | Matrix for dental fillings |
US6375463B1 (en) * | 1998-04-22 | 2002-04-23 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Dental wedges having proximal ends with gritty top layers |
US6605651B1 (en) * | 1998-09-09 | 2003-08-12 | Biomat Sciences, Inc. | Curing methods and material compositions having dental and other applications |
US6974321B2 (en) * | 1998-11-17 | 2005-12-13 | Innerlite, Inc. | Intraoral device |
US6336810B1 (en) | 1999-04-02 | 2002-01-08 | Danville Materials | Ring for use in preparing teeth for restoration |
US20020128347A1 (en) * | 1999-04-12 | 2002-09-12 | Blackwell Grodon B. | Dental composite restorative material and method of restoring a tooth |
US6315566B1 (en) | 1999-05-18 | 2001-11-13 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dental materials |
US6155823A (en) * | 1999-06-18 | 2000-12-05 | Bisco Inc. | Snap-on light shield for a dental composite light curing gun |
US6325625B1 (en) | 1999-06-28 | 2001-12-04 | Dentsply International Inc. | Dental separator and matrix stabilizing device |
US6350122B1 (en) * | 1999-07-15 | 2002-02-26 | Dentsply International Inc. | Dental matrix with lateral illumination ports |
US6234793B1 (en) * | 1999-07-19 | 2001-05-22 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Textured dental matrix bands and related methods |
US6142778A (en) * | 1999-07-21 | 2000-11-07 | Summer; John D. | Dental insert |
US6599125B1 (en) | 1999-08-27 | 2003-07-29 | University Of Connecticut | Prefabricated components for dental appliances |
NZ542400A (en) * | 1999-10-08 | 2007-05-31 | Britesmile Professional Inc | Apparatus for simultaneous illumination of teeth |
US6540072B1 (en) * | 1999-12-06 | 2003-04-01 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Syringe set rack system and related methods |
US6482005B1 (en) * | 1999-12-16 | 2002-11-19 | John Summer | Method and apparatus for shaping dental filling material |
AU1409201A (en) * | 1999-12-24 | 2001-07-09 | Ivoclar Vivadent Ag | Atraumatic approximal space dilator |
US6220253B1 (en) * | 2000-01-14 | 2001-04-24 | Ann Marie Wright | Dental implement storage assembly |
US20040229186A1 (en) | 2000-02-11 | 2004-11-18 | Slone Charles E. | Dental hand tool for interproximal dental restorations |
USD439667S1 (en) | 2000-05-30 | 2001-03-27 | Dennis E. Brown | Dental wedge |
US20010049081A1 (en) * | 2000-06-02 | 2001-12-06 | Nelson Krupp | Orthodontic separator loop |
DE50106869D1 (en) * | 2000-09-29 | 2005-09-01 | Kerrhawe S A Bioggio | Interdental wedge |
US6482007B2 (en) | 2000-12-22 | 2002-11-19 | Centrix, Inc. | Dental wedge with handle |
US6659772B2 (en) | 2001-02-23 | 2003-12-09 | Cosmedent, Inc. | Provisional restorations for human teeth and method |
US6712608B2 (en) * | 2001-04-19 | 2004-03-30 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Anatomically contoured matrix bands for use in dental restoration procedures |
US20020155410A1 (en) * | 2001-04-19 | 2002-10-24 | Bills Dan J. | Anatomically shaped sectional matrix band retainers |
US7589132B2 (en) * | 2001-05-01 | 2009-09-15 | Pentron Clinical Technologies, Llc | Dental resins, dental composite materials, and method of manufacture thereof |
US6435874B1 (en) * | 2001-07-05 | 2002-08-20 | Thomas E. Hughes | Elastic dental device |
US6468080B1 (en) * | 2001-09-04 | 2002-10-22 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Dental wedge incorporating mechanically flexible features |
US6890176B2 (en) * | 2001-09-20 | 2005-05-10 | Christian W. Hahn | Interproximal matrix with elastomeric wedge |
US20030165793A1 (en) * | 2001-10-27 | 2003-09-04 | Dan Yobel | System for dispensing viscous materials |
AU2002347456A1 (en) * | 2001-11-19 | 2003-06-10 | Tri-Dent Innovations Limited | Dental contact matrix limited |
US6976841B1 (en) | 2002-02-21 | 2005-12-20 | Nova Ranger, Inc. | Intra oral dental irradiation device for material curing and dental imaging |
US6756417B2 (en) * | 2002-03-13 | 2004-06-29 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Dental bonding compositions for adhering amalgam restoratives to dental substrates |
US20030176531A1 (en) * | 2002-03-14 | 2003-09-18 | Dorothy Kassab | Cured uncured boxfill |
US6767955B2 (en) * | 2002-05-08 | 2004-07-27 | Pentron Clinical Technologies | Flowable dental resin materials and method of use thereof |
US6619956B1 (en) | 2002-05-15 | 2003-09-16 | C. Douglas Weir | Dental matrix strip |
US6893258B1 (en) | 2002-06-11 | 2005-05-17 | Cms-Dental Aps | Dental material curing apparatus |
AU2003298561A1 (en) * | 2002-08-23 | 2004-05-13 | Jonathan S. Dahm | Method and apparatus for using light emitting diodes |
US7094057B2 (en) * | 2002-09-13 | 2006-08-22 | Joshua Friedman | Dental light curing member and method |
ITRI20030005A1 (en) | 2003-07-02 | 2005-01-03 | Vincenzo Gargiulo | ANATOMICAL MINI-CABLE ILLUMINATOR. |
US7137812B2 (en) * | 2003-10-03 | 2006-11-21 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Apparatus for indirect bonding of orthodontic appliances and method of making the same |
US20050089814A1 (en) * | 2003-10-24 | 2005-04-28 | Slone Charles E. | Dental matrix for a class II, III or IV restoration |
US20050089813A1 (en) * | 2003-10-24 | 2005-04-28 | Slone Charles E. | Matrix wedge restorative dental system and method of use |
EP1541092B1 (en) * | 2003-12-08 | 2012-07-25 | McDonald, Simon Paul | A matrix band retainer |
US20050287491A1 (en) * | 2004-03-18 | 2005-12-29 | Slone Charles E | Bi-laminate martix and method of use |
US20050255428A1 (en) * | 2004-05-14 | 2005-11-17 | Allan Coopersmith | Dental insert and method of tooth restoration |
US7649029B2 (en) * | 2004-05-17 | 2010-01-19 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dental compositions containing nanozirconia fillers |
US7097364B2 (en) * | 2004-06-03 | 2006-08-29 | Shu-Lung Wang | Optical curing apparatus |
US7270543B2 (en) * | 2004-06-29 | 2007-09-18 | Therametric Technologies, Inc. | Handpiece for caries detection |
US20060019217A1 (en) | 2004-07-22 | 2006-01-26 | Yates David W | Anterior composite matrix dental restoration system |
US7367802B2 (en) | 2004-09-25 | 2008-05-06 | Dominic Anthony Viscomi | Barrier free matrix band with flash guard |
US20060088798A1 (en) * | 2004-10-25 | 2006-04-27 | Feinbloom Richard E | Light tip for dental use |
CA2588103A1 (en) * | 2004-11-16 | 2006-05-26 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Dental compositions with calcium phosphorus releasing glass |
WO2006061467A1 (en) * | 2004-12-08 | 2006-06-15 | Denis Simon | Dental restoration device |
TWM271549U (en) | 2005-01-13 | 2005-08-01 | Jian-Shin Yang | Oral cavity lighting device |
US20060188835A1 (en) * | 2005-02-22 | 2006-08-24 | Rich Nagel | Multi-wavelength dental light curing gun |
US7857619B2 (en) | 2005-02-26 | 2010-12-28 | Yongqian Liu | LED curing light having fresnel lenses |
US20060199144A1 (en) | 2005-03-05 | 2006-09-07 | Yongqian Liu | High Efficiency LED Curing Light System |
US7083412B1 (en) * | 2005-03-14 | 2006-08-01 | Armen Karapetyan | Dental tooth spacer assembly |
US20060275732A1 (en) * | 2005-06-01 | 2006-12-07 | Cao Group, Inc. | Curing light |
US20060275733A1 (en) * | 2005-06-01 | 2006-12-07 | Cao Group, Inc. | Three-dimensional curing light |
US8177553B2 (en) * | 2005-12-22 | 2012-05-15 | Walter Stoll | Dental strip |
US20070172793A1 (en) * | 2006-01-23 | 2007-07-26 | Garrison Dental Solutions | Dental implement for tooth restoration |
US8786689B1 (en) | 2010-04-15 | 2014-07-22 | Yongqian R. Liu | Modular optical medical diagnostic system |
EP2934363B1 (en) | 2012-12-20 | 2019-05-29 | Dental Art Innovations PTY Ltd | Apparatus for preparing contoured glazed composite dental veneers |
US20170056130A1 (en) | 2015-09-01 | 2017-03-02 | James L. Cannon | Air cooled dental photocuring light and method of using same |
-
2007
- 2007-08-07 US US11/834,959 patent/US8272868B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2007-08-07 US US11/834,993 patent/US20080064004A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-08-07 US US11/834,974 patent/US20080064009A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-08-07 US US11/834,907 patent/US9308058B2/en active Active
- 2007-08-07 US US11/834,945 patent/US20080064003A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2007-08-07 US US11/834,934 patent/US8047843B2/en active Active
- 2007-09-12 WO PCT/US2007/078276 patent/WO2008033925A2/en active Application Filing
-
2012
- 2012-08-31 US US13/600,384 patent/US20120322026A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2016
- 2016-04-08 US US15/094,660 patent/US10405946B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2019
- 2019-09-06 US US16/563,532 patent/US11382717B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US4266547A (en) * | 1977-05-16 | 1981-05-12 | Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. | Laser knife |
US5201655A (en) * | 1988-12-21 | 1993-04-13 | Joshua Friedman | Optical light guide for controlling the irradiation of a dental restorative material |
US5470331A (en) * | 1990-01-22 | 1995-11-28 | S.L.T. Japan Co., Ltd. | Laser light irradiation apparatus for medical treatment |
US20020001202A1 (en) * | 1997-07-02 | 2002-01-03 | Williams Jeffrey B. | Light delivery systems and applications thereof |
US6208788B1 (en) * | 1998-07-29 | 2001-03-27 | Ultradent Products, Inc. | Apparatus and methods for concentrating light through fiber optic funnels coupled to dental light guides |
US20060019220A1 (en) * | 2004-07-22 | 2006-01-26 | Ondine International Ltd. | Sonophotodynamic therapy for dental applications |
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20140051032A1 (en) * | 2011-10-18 | 2014-02-20 | Fly Cast Technologies, Inc. | Coating for a dental matrix band |
US20130252199A1 (en) * | 2012-03-26 | 2013-09-26 | David J. Clark | Dental Separator Ring |
US9358080B2 (en) * | 2012-03-26 | 2016-06-07 | David J. Clark | Dental separator ring |
US10159548B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-12-25 | Garrison Dental Solutions, L.L.C. | Dental curing light |
US11116616B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2021-09-14 | Garrison Dental Solutions, L.L.C. | Dental curing light |
US12011331B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2024-06-18 | Garrison Dental Solutions, L.L.C. | Dental curing light |
USD810293S1 (en) | 2017-01-20 | 2018-02-13 | Garrison Dental Solutions, Llc | Dental instrument |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US11382717B2 (en) | 2022-07-12 |
US20160220328A1 (en) | 2016-08-04 |
US20200015935A1 (en) | 2020-01-16 |
US9308058B2 (en) | 2016-04-12 |
US20080064000A1 (en) | 2008-03-13 |
US20080064002A1 (en) | 2008-03-13 |
US20080064004A1 (en) | 2008-03-13 |
US8047843B2 (en) | 2011-11-01 |
US20080064009A1 (en) | 2008-03-13 |
US20080064012A1 (en) | 2008-03-13 |
US20080064003A1 (en) | 2008-03-13 |
WO2008033925A2 (en) | 2008-03-20 |
US8272868B2 (en) | 2012-09-25 |
WO2008033925A3 (en) | 2008-07-31 |
US10405946B2 (en) | 2019-09-10 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US11382717B2 (en) | Devices and a seamless, single load cavity preparation and filing technique | |
US11890156B2 (en) | Dental matrix and dental matrix system | |
US8043092B2 (en) | Demonstration dental template and matching temporary overlay | |
US8393897B2 (en) | Methods and devices for diastema closure | |
US20070292821A1 (en) | Dental Prostheses | |
US20110250563A1 (en) | Interdental device | |
US6659772B2 (en) | Provisional restorations for human teeth and method | |
JP2023089305A (en) | Methods and devices for closing space between teeth | |
Heymann et al. | Introduction to composite restorations | |
Stappert et al. | Ceramic Veneers and Partial‐Coverage Restorations | |
Goncharuk-Khomyn et al. | FUNDAMENTALS OF AESTHETIC DENTAL RESTORATION Educational and methodical textbook for practical classes in fundamentals of aesthetic dental restoration for 4th-year students of the dental faculty | |
Julian et al. | Building Natural Contacts and Contours while Restoring Teeth-A Narrative Review | |
RU2268678C2 (en) | Reinforcing net-adhesive pin and method of its manufacture | |
Banerji et al. | Cavity Preparation | |
Class | Best practices: Restorative complications | |
Stevenson III | Best practices: Restorative complications | |
LEV | Anterior Bonded Restorations |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |